FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 009101 - 1 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL ADDENDUM NO. 1 #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
SECTION 009101
ADDENDUM NO. 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General: for the purpose of proposal, the Bidding and Contract Documents for the above project are changed as described herein. The changes shall take precedence, and all other provisions of the Bidding and Contract Documents shall remain in force.
B. Notation on Bid form: Failure to note receipt of this Addendum on a submitted Bid form in accordance with the Bidding Documents may be cause for rejection of any Bid so submitted.
PART 2 - DRAWING CHANGES
2.1 NEW DRAWINGS
A. The following additional Drawings dated February 18, 2020, are issued with this Addendum, and are deemed a part thereof. In addition, these Drawings are added to the List of Drawings within the Bidding and Contract Drawings and in the Bid form.
Number Title
VOLUME 1A Civil C5.03 Fire Access Plan C5.04 Fire Flow Test C6.02 Utility Profiles C7.05 Construction Details Vi
Landscape L4.00 Site Details
Structural SC2.60 Alternate Main Entrance Canopy & Screen Wall Foundation and Roof Framing Plans SC5.10 Floor Framing Sections & Details
VOLUME 1 B Electrical EC2.11 Partial Existing Building Plans - Electrical
Mechanical MC2.12 Partial Existing Building Plans - Mechanical
VOLUME 2 Electrical ET6.03 Electrical Schedules
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 009101 - 2 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL ADDENDUM NO. 1 #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
2.2 REVISED DRAWINGS
A. The following Drawings have been revised, bear revision date February 18, 2020, are issued with this Addendum, and are deemed a part thereof. The changes to be made are identified on each Drawing.
Number Title
VOLUME 1A General GC0.01A Drawing Index
Civil C2.00 Overall Site Demolition Plan C2.01 Site Demolition Plan I C2.02 Site Demolition Plan II C3.00 Overall Site Layout Plan C3.01 Site Layout & Staking Plan I C3.02 Site Layout & Staking Plan II C4.00 Overall Site Grading Plan C4.01 Site Grading & Drainage Plan I C4.02 Site Grading & Drainage Plan II C4.04 Underground Storm Detention Pond Details C5.00 Overall Site Utility Plan C5.01 Site Utility Plan I C5.02 Site Utility Plan II C6.00 Utility Profiles C6.01 Utility Profiles C7.00 Construction Details I C7.01 Construction Details II EC2.00 Initial ES & PC Plan EC2.01 Intermediate ES & PC Plan EC2.02 Final ES & PC Plan
Landscape L2.00 General Notes And Overall Site Plan L2.01 Overall Theater And Classroom Site Plan L2.02 Theater Hardscape Enlargement L2.03 Courtyard & North-South Corridor Path Enlargement L2.04 South Of Classroom Enlargement L3.02 Theater Landscape Enlargement L3.03 South Of Classroom Landscape Enlargement L3.04 Planting Schedules Notes And Details L4.01 Site Details
Architectural AC1.00 Architectural Site Demo Plan AC1.00A Phasing Plan AC2.07 Level 1 - Partial Plan - Area D AC2.08 Level 2 - Partial Plan - Areas A & B AC2.09 Level 2 - Partial Plan - Area C AC2.10 Level 2 - Partial Plan - Area D AC2.12 Level 3 - Partial Plan - Area C AC2.20 Finish Material Legend and Details AC2.21 Overall Finish Plan - Level 1 AC2.22 Overall Finish Plan - Level 2 FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 009101 - 3 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL ADDENDUM NO. 1 #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Number Title
Architectural (continued) AC2.23 Overall Finish Plan - Level 3 AC2.30 Level 3 - Partial Finish Plan - Areas A & B AC2.45 Level 1 - Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan - Area C AC2.46 Level 1 - Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan - Area D AC2.47 Level 2 - Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan - Areas A & B AC2.48 Level 2 - Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan - Area C AC2.49 Level 2 - Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan - Area D AC2.51 Level 3 - Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan - Area C AC2.52 Level 3 - Partial Reflected Ceiling Plan - Area D AC3.01 Enlarged Plans and Elevations - Typical Classroom AC3.02 Enlarged Plans and Elevations - Chemistry Lab AC3.03 Enlarged Plans and Elevations - Physics Lab AC3.04 Enlarged Plans and Elevations - Biology Lab AC3.05 Enlarged Plans and Elevations - Team Project & Teachers Work Room AC3.08 Enlarged Plans and Elevations - Computer Labs AC3.15 Enlarged Plans and Sections - Pressbox AC3.27 Interior Elevations - Area A & Area C AC3.28 Interior Elevations - Area B AC7.03 Stair Plans & Details AC9.10A Door Schedule and Types AC9.10B Door Schedule and Types AC9.40 Level 1 - Signage Plan
Structural S1.02 Concrete General Notes & Schedules S1.04 Steel & CFSF General Notes & Schedules S3.01 Steel Col BRG Sections & Details SC1.05 Class/Gym - Design Loads Notes & Schedules SC2.05 Partial Foundation Plan - Level 1 - Area B SC2.06 Partial Foundation Plan - Level 1 - Area C SC2.07 Partial Foundation Plan - Level 1 - Area D SC2.08 Partial Foundation & Floor Framing Plan - Level 2 - Areas A & B SC2.09 Partial Foundation & Floor Framing Plan - Level 2 - Area C SC2.10 Partial Foundation & Floor Framing Plan - Level 2 - Area D SC2.11 Partial Floor Framing Plan - Level 3 - Areas A & B SC2.12 Partial Floor Framing Plan - Level 3 - Area C SC2.13 Partial Floor Framing Plan - Level 3 - Area D SC2.14 Partial Floor Framing Plan - Level 3 - Area E SC2.15 Partial Roof Framing Plan - Area A SC2.17 Partial Roof Framing Plan - Area C SC2.18 Partial Roof Framing Plan - Area D SC2.19 Partial Roof Framing Plan - Area E SC2.20 Fixed Bleacher Foundation & Framing Plans - Area D SC2.21 Partial Enlarged Foundation & Floor Framing Plans - Area A/D SC3.03 Foundation Sections & Details SC3.04 Foundation Sections & Details SC3.05 Foundation Sections & Details SC5.04 Floor Framing Sections & Details SC5.05 Floor Framing Sections & Details SC5.06 Floor Framing Sections & Details SC5.07 Floor Framing Sections & Details SC5.09 Floor Framing Sections & Details SC6.04 Roof Framing Sections & Details FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 009101 - 4 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL ADDENDUM NO. 1 #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Number Title
VOLUME 1 B General GC0.01B Drawing Index - Volume #01B
Electrical EC0.11 Site Plan - Electrical EC1.01 Overall Level 1 Floor Plan - Electrical EC1.04 Overall Roof Plan - Electrical EC2.01 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area B - Electrical EC2.02 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area C -Electrical EC2.03 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area D -Electrical EC2.04 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area A&B -Electrical EC2.05 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area C -Electrical EC2.06 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area D -Electrical EC2.07 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area A -Electrical EC2.08 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area C -Electrical EC2.09 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area D -Electrical EC2.10 Pump House Plan - Electrical EC3.01 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area B - Lighting EC3.02 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area C - Lighting EC3.03 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area D - Lighting EC3.04 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area A&B - Lighting EC3.05 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area C - Lighting EC3.06 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area D - Lighting EC3.07 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area A&B - Lighting EC3.08 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area C - Lighting EC3.09 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area D - Lighting EC5.01 Electrical Riser Diagram & Schedules EC6.01 Electrical Panel Schedules EC6.02 Electrical Panel Schedules EC6.03 Electrical Panel Schedules EC6.04 Electrical Panel Schedules EC6.05 Electrical Panel Schedules EC6.06 Electrical Panel Schedules EC6.10 Mechanical Connection Schedule - Electrical EC6.11 Electrical Schedules ECS1.01 Overall Level 1 Floor Plan - System ECS1.02 Overall Level 2 Floor Plan - System ECS1.03 Overall Level 3 Floor Plan - System
Mechanical MC0.01 General Notes and Legend - Mechanical MC0.11 Site Plan - Mechanical MC1.01 Overall Level 1 Floor Plan - Mechanical MC1.02 Overall Level 2 Floor Plan - Mechanical MC1.03 Overall Level 3 Floor Plan - Mechanical MC1.04 Overall Roof Plan - Mechanical MC2.01 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area B - Mechanical MC2.02 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area C - Mechanical MC2.03 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area D - Mechanical MC2.04 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area A&B - Mechanical MC2.05 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area C - Mechanical MC2.06 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area D - Mechanical MC2.07 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area A&B - Mechanical MC2.08 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area C - Mechanical FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 009101 - 5 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL ADDENDUM NO. 1 #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Number Title
Mechanical (continued) MC2.09 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area D - Mechanical MC3.01 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area B - Piping MC3.02 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area C - Piping MC3.03 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area D - Piping MC3.04 Partial Level 2 Plan - Areas A&B - Piping MC3.05 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area C - Piping MC3.06 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area D - Piping MC3.07 Partial Level 3 Plan - Areas A&B - Piping MC3.08 Partial Leve 3 Plan - Area C - Piping MC3.09 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area D - Piping MC6.01 Schedules - Mechanical MC6.02 Schedules - Mechanical MC6.03 Schedules - Mechanical
Plumbing PC0.01 Plumbing Notes, Legends & Schedules - Plumbing PC0.10 Plumbing Site Plan PC2.02 Partial Level 1 Plan - Area C - Plumbing PC2.05 Partial Level 2 Plan - Area C - Plumbing PC2.08 Partial Level 3 Plan - Area C - Plumbing PC2.11 Partial Roof Level - Area A & B - Plumbing PC2.12 Partial Roof Level - Area C - Plumbing PC2.13 Partial Roof Level - Area D - Plumbing PC2.14 Partial Roof Level - Area E - Plumbing PC3.02 Enlarged Plans - Plumbing PC3.06 Enlarged Plans - Plumbing PC3.08 Enlarged Plans - Plumbing PC3.09 Enlarged Plans - Plumbing PC3.10 Enlarged Plans - Plumbing
VOLUME 2 General GT0.01 Drawing Index
Architectural AT2.05 Roof Plan AT2.10 Partial Plan- Entry and Rear of Theater AT2.11 Partial Floor Plan -Stage & Support Spaces AT2.20 Finish Material Legend and Details AT2.21 Finish Plan - Entry Level - Overall AT2.25 Partial Finish Plan - Entry and Rear of Theater AT2.26 Partial Finish Plan - Stage and Theater AT2.31 Reflected Ceiling Plan - Entry Level - Overall AT2.32 Reflected Ceiling Plan - Stage Level - Overall AT2.33 Reflected Ceiling Plan - Pit Level - Overall AT2.35 Reflected Ceiling Plan - Entry and Rear of Theater AT2.36 Reflected Ceiling Plan - Stage and Theater AT2.37 Reflected Ceiling Plan - Pit and Control Booth AT3.01 Enlarged Plans - Restrooms AT4.01 Exterior Elevations AT4.02 Exterior Elevations AT4.10 Interior Elevations AT4.12 Interior Elevations FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 009101 - 6 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL ADDENDUM NO. 1 #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Number Title
Architectural (continued) AT5.31 Wall Sections AT5.35 Wall Sections - West AT6.21 Section Details AT6.22 Section Details AT6.23 Section Details AT7.01 Stair Plans & Details AT9.10 Door Schedule and Types AT9.40 Overall Signage Plan - Entry Level
Structural ST1.05 Pac - Design Loads Notes & Schedules ST2.01 Overall Foundation Plan & Slab Elevations ST2.02 Entry Level Foundation Plan ST2.03 Pit Level Foundation Plan ST2.04 Low Roof Framing Plan ST2.06 Fly Loft Partial Plans & Elevations ST3.03 Foundation Sections & Details ST6.07 Roof Framing Sections & Details
Electrical ET2.01 Partial Plan - Pit & Control Booth - Electrical ET2.02 Partial Plan - Entry & Rear of Theater - Electrical ET2.03 Partial Plan - Stage & Theater - Electrical ET3.01 Partial Plan - Pit & Control Booth - Lighting ET3.02 Partial Plan - Entry & Rear of Theater - Lighting ET3.03 Partial Plan - Stage & Theater - Lighting ET6.01 Electrical Panel Schedules ET6.02 Electrical Panel Schedules
Mechanical MT0.01 General Notes and Legend - Mechanical MT2.02 Partial Plan - Entry & Rear of Theater - Mechanical MT2.03 Partial Plan - Stage & Theater - Mechanical MT4.01 Sections - Mechanical MT4.02 Sections - Mechanical
Plumbing PT1.01 Overall Stage & 1st Level Floor Plan - Plumbing
RT RT2.01 Overall Rigging Plan RT2.02 Enlarged Plan -Rear Elevation - Plot RT2.03 Front Elevations
2.3 DELETED DRAWINGS
A. The following Drawings have been deleted. These shall be deleted from the List of Drawings.
Number Title
Telecom T0.01 General Notes, Legends & Details - Telecom T0.02 Outlet Details T0.03 Camera Details FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 009101 - 7 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL ADDENDUM NO. 1 #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
PART 3 - SPECIFICATION CHANGES
3.1 NEW SPECIFICATIONS
A. The following additional Specification sections dated February 18, 2020, are issued with this Addendum, and are deemed a part thereof. In addition, these sections are added to the Table of Contents within the Project Manual.
Section Number Title
01101 Alternates 009101 Addendum No. 1
3.2 REISSUED SPECIFICATIONS
A. The following additional Specification sections dated February 18, 2020, are reissued with this Addendum, and are deemed a part thereof. In addition, these sections are added to the Table of Contents within the Project Manual.
Section Number Title
00021 Request for Proposals 260600 Stage Lighting and Rigging Equipment
3.3 REVISED SPECIFICATIONS
A. The following Specification sections have been revised, bear revision date February 18, 2020, are issued with this Addendum, and are deemed a part thereof. The changes to be made are identified on the revised pages of each section, attached hereinafter, unless noted otherwise.
Section Number Title
TOC Table of Contents 00210 Specific Date Construction Schedule 072100 Thermal Insulation 095426 Wood Wall Panels 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring
PART 4 - CLARIFICATIONS
4.1 GENERAL
A. The following clarifications are issued with this Addendum, and are deemed a part thereof. 1. Telecom deleted Drawings apply to Volume 1B and 2. 2. See attached RFI log with responses.
END OF SECTION 009101 FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 009101 - 8 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL ADDENDUM NO. 1 #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
RFP P0720, Pebblebrook HS New Gym, Theater and Addition Questions and Answers, Addendum 1
# Vendor Subject Question Response (contact & company) 1. David Keener Civil Sheet C2.02: the existing driveway east of Yes driveway to be widen to 24’. New asphalt is to Bowen- be provided. Heavy Duty stops at corner of gym as watson the existing gym appears to be 19’-1” wide indicated. on sheet C2.02 and the saw cut line and limits of disturbance are shown near the southeast corner of the gym in that area however sheet C3.00 and C3.02 show the driveway as 24’ wide and a new concrete curb extending northward past grid line “H”. No new asphalt is shown past the corner of the gym. Are we to widen that driveway?
2. David Keener Civil the detail for light duty asphalt paving is Yes, utilize Geotech recommendations. Refer to Bowen- revised construction details page. Grass paving has watson shown on sheet C7.00 but I don’t see details be removed from project. Refer to revised for the following: Landscape drawings. 1. Heavy duty asphalt paving 2. Grass paving 3. Heavy duty concrete paving 4. Vehicle rated concrete paving (if that is different from HD concrete paving) I found recommendations for the paving types (except for grass paving) in the geo report, page 18. Should we use these?
Page 1 of 4
RFP P0720, Pebblebrook HS New Gym, Theater and Addition Questions and Answers, Addendum 1
# Vendor Subject Question Response (contact & company) 3. Kelly Nix ARCH The drawings (typ) call for Mineral Wool Cavity wall Details indicate mineral-wool insulation typical for all Vice President insulation. The specification 72100-4, 3.5 state to above grade details. Where walls transition to of Operations use Foam Plastic Board insulation. Foam Plastic below grade the insulation transitions to rigid insulation board. Nix-Fowler Board insulation is extruded polystyrene per Mineral-wool insulation is noted in specifications Constructors, specification 72100-1, 2.1. Please clarify which type 072100 2.2A. Inc. of insulation to use at CMU to brick cavity wall, and if it is Mineral Wool please provide a specification for the Mineral Wool cavity wall insulation.
4. David Keener Structural structural drawing SC5.05 shows concrete Sections 3/SC3.03 & 2/SC5.05 added in Addendum Bowen- 1 clarifying concrete wall detailing each side of the watson walls supporting both the lower portion of bleachers. Sections 3/SC5.05, & 4/SC5.05 added in the poured-in-place concrete bleachers and Addendum 1 clarifying concrete bleacher connection the bleachers closer to the mid-span but to Level 2 steel floor framing. Walls supporting the bleachers shall be concrete as shown in the does not show how to support the upper Structural drawings. [PES] end of the bleachers. The architectural drawings show CMU walls in each of these locations. We also need clarification on construction of the wing walls that support these bleachers on each side.
Page 2 of 4
RFP P0720, Pebblebrook HS New Gym, Theater and Addition Questions and Answers, Addendum 1
# Vendor Subject Question Response (contact & company) 5. David Keener Structural Please confirm that piers are required where Concrete piers per 4/S3.01 are required: Bowen- watson interior column footing as more than 1’ 1) At interior columns where T/ftg is below (-)2’- BFF. And please clarify if piers are required 8” BFF as noted on 1/S3.01. Where pier is where footings are more than -3’-4” or -2’- required at interior columns, T/pier = (-)1’-0” per 4/S3.01. 0” BFF 2) At exterior columns where T/ftg is below (- )3’-4” BFF as noted on 2/S3.01. Where pier is required at exterior columns, T/pier = (-)2’- 0” per 4/S3.01.
[PES] 6.
7.
8.
9.
Page 3 of 4
RFP P0720, Pebblebrook HS New Gym, Theater and Addition Questions and Answers, Addendum 1
# Vendor Subject Question Response (contact & company) 10.
11.
12.
13.
Page 4 of 4
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 TOC - 1 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL TABLE OF CONTENTS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements
00021 Request for Proposals ...... Reissued 02/18/20 00102 Instructions to Offerors 00210 Specific Date Construction Schedule ...... Revised 02/18/20 00310 Bid Proposal Form 003132 Geotechnical Data 005200 Agreement Form 006100 Bond Forms 006200 Certificate of Final Payment to Contractor Form 007200 General Conditions 00820 Liquidated Damages 009101 Addendum No. 1 ...... Issued 02/18/20
SPECIFICATIONS
Division 01 - General Requirements (Cobb County School District)
01101 Alternates ...... Issued 02/18/20 01200 General Requirements 01300 Submittals 01310 Construction Schedules 01312 Project Meetings 01400 Testing Laboratory Services 01410 NPDES Storm Water Permitting 014150 Special Inspections 01500 Temporary Facilities 01630 Substitutions 01650 Project Record Documents 01675 Final Cleaning 01700 Contract Closeout 01739 Cutting and Patching
Division 02 – Existing Conditions
020100 Sitework-General Requirements 024116 Site Demolition 024119 Selective Demolition
Division 03 - Concrete
033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete
Division 04 - Masonry
040110 Masonry Cleaning 042000 Unit Masonry 047200 Cast Stone Masonry
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 TOC - 2 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL TABLE OF CONTENTS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Division 05 - Metals
051200 Structural Steel 052100 Steel Joist / Girders 053100 Steel Deck 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055113 Metal Pan Stairs 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings 055313 Bar Gratings
Division 06 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites
061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 062023 Interior Finish Carpentry 064116 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets 066116 Solid-Surfacing Fabrications
Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection
071326 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 071616 Crystalline Waterproofing 071700 Bentonite Waterproofing 072100 Thermal Insulation ...... Revised 02/18/20 072119 Foamed-In-Place Insulation 072600 Vapor Retarders 072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers 074213.13 Formed Metal Wall Panels 074213.16 Metal Plate Wall Panels 074213.53 Metal Soffit Panels 075216 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 077100 Roof Specialties 077200 Roof Accessories 078100 Applied Fireproofing 078413 Penetration Firestopping 078443 Joint Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants 079513 Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies
Division 08 - Openings
081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081416 Flush Wood Doors 083113 Access Doors and Frames 083313 Coiling Counter Doors 083323 Overhead Coiling Doors 083343 Fire Shutters 083519 Folding Fire Doors/Walls 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls 085653 Security Windows 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing 088300 Mirrors 089119 Fixed Louvers
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 TOC - 3 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL TABLE OF CONTENTS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Division 09 - Finishes
092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing 092900 Gypsum Board 093013 Ceramic Tiling 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 095426 Wood Ceilings and Wall Panels ...... Revised 02/18/20 096466 Wood Athletic Flooring 096468 Wood Stage Flooring 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring ...... Revised 02/18/20 096566 Resilient Athletic Flooring 096766 Fluid-Applied Athletic Flooring 096813 Tile Carpeting 097723 Fabric-Wrapped Panels 097756 Interior Architectural Film 098433 Sound-Absorbing Wall Units 098436 Sound-Absorbing Ceiling Units 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Interior Painting
Division 10 - Specialties
101100 Visual Display Units 101419 Dimensional Letter Signage 101423 Panel Signage 102113.17 Phenolic-Core Toilet Compartments 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets 104416 Fire Extinguishers 105113 Metal Lockers 105613 Metal Storage Shelving 107316 Canopies
Division 11 - Equipment
111319 Stationary Loading Dock Equipment 113100 Residential Appliances 115213 Projection Screens & Lifts 115313 Laboratory Fume Hoods 116123 Folding and Portable Stages 116623 Gymnasium Equipment 116643 Scoreboards
Division 12 - Furnishings
122113 Louver Blinds 123553 Laboratory Casework 123661.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops 126100 Fixed Audience Seating 126600 Telescoping Stands
Division 13 - Special Construction (Not Applicable)
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 TOC - 4 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL TABLE OF CONTENTS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Division 14 - Conveying Equipment
142400 Hydraulic Elevators 144200 Wheelchair Lifts
Division 15 to Division 20 (Not Applicable)
Division 21 - Fire Suppression
210000 Fire Protection General
Division 22 - Plumbing
220000 Plumbing General 221321 Acid Waste and Vent Systems 221600 Natural Gas Piping System 224000 Plumbing Fixtures
Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning (HVAC)
230000 HVAC General 230300 Roof Curbs 230523 Valves for HVAC Piping 230548 Noise and Vibration Control 230593 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) 230700 HVAC Insulation 230900 Building Automation System (BAS) 232113 Piping and Accessories 232113.13 Pre-Insulated Underground Piping System 232116 Hydronic Piping Specialties 232300 Refrigerant Piping, Insulation and Accessories 232500 Water Treatment 233100 Ductwork and Accessories 233400 Unitary Exhaust and Supply Fans and Ventilators 233700 Louvers, Grilles, Registers and Diffusers 235216 Condensing Boilers (Hot Water) 236513 Cooling Towers (Induced Draft Crossflow Type) 237400 Single Package Rooftop Air Conditioners 238128.13 Ductless Split System Heat Pumps (1 to 3-1/2 Tons) 238146 Water Source Heat Pump Units
Division 24 (Not Applicable)
Division 25 - Integrated Automation (Not Applicable)
Division 26 - Electrical
260000 Electrical General 260519 Conductors 260526 Grounding 260531 Seismic Restraint of Electrical Systems Components 260533 Conduit and Raceways 260534 Outlet Boxes and Junction Boxes 260591 Raceways for Audio/Video Systems 260593 Enclosures for Low Voltage Systems 260600 Stage Lighting and Rigging Equipment ...... Reissued 02/18/20 260923 Occupancy Sensors
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 TOC - 5 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL TABLE OF CONTENTS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Division 26 – Electrical (continued)
262200 Dry Type Transformers 262413 Switchboards 262416 Panelboards 262726 Wiring Devices 262816 Disconnect Switches 262818 Enclosed Circuit Breakers 263213 Emergency Standby Generator System and Switching 264313 Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 265100 Lighting
Division 27 – Communications
274100 General Provisions – Audio/Video Systems 274130 Audio Systems 274140 Video Systems 274150 Remote Control Systems 274155 Audio/Video Computers & Network 274160 Production Intercom Systems 274170 Audio/Video Hardware 274172 Audio/Video Plates 274175 Audio/Video AC Power Distribution 275313 Clock Systems
Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security
283111 Fire Alarm System
Division 29 to Division 30 (Not Applicable)
Division 31 - Earthwork
311000 Site Clearing 312000 Earth Moving 312319 Construction Dewatering 312500 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls 313116 Termite Control – Soil
Division 32 - Exterior Improvements
321216 Asphalt Paving 321313 Concrete Paving 321723 Painted Pavement Markings 321823 Synthetic Track Surfacing System 323113 Steel Chain Link Fences and Gates 328000 Irrigation 329115 Soil Preparation (Performance Specification) 329200 Turf and Grasses 329300 Plants
Division 33 – Utilities
331000 Site Water Distribution Piping 334100 Storm Drainage 334600 Subdrainage 337000 Sanitary Sewers
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 TOC - 6 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL TABLE OF CONTENTS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
Division 34 to Division 49 (Not Applicable)
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
00021 RFP P1520 – Pebblebrook High School New Gym, Theater and Addition REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL INVITATION Cobb County School District
SECTION 00021 REQUEST FOR PROPOSALS RFP P1520
This project consists of, but is not limited to, the demolition and removal of existing building structures and site elements as well as selective demolition and renovation within buildings to remain. New construction includes, but is not limited to a new 750-seat performing arts theater adjacent to the existing theater, new three-story classroom and two story, 3000 seat, gymnasium building structure sited in the middle of the existing campus. Site improvements include, but are not limited to roads, parking lots, storm water detention, utilities, landscaping, and resurfacing of a 400-meter track (as an alternate).
Sealed proposals are requested by Cobb County School District from General Contractors (no other license will be acceptable) for construction of:
SCHOOL: Pebblebrook High School New Gym, Theater and Addition PROJECT NO.: B007 PROPOSAL NO.: RFP P1520
Proposals will be received by the Cobb County School District, Procurement Services Department at 6975 Cobb International Blvd. Kennesaw, Georgia 30152 until:
3:00 PM, ET, March 4, 2020
At which time and place the proposals will be received. Proposals will be time and date stamped upon receipt at Cobb County School District Procurement Services Department. The exact time of receipt is determined by the date/time stamp. Proposals received late will not be considered.
A pre-proposal conference will be held at the Bid Room (Suite G), 6975 Cobb International Blvd., Kennesaw, GA 30152 on Monday, February 10, 2020 at 10:00 AM ET. Information regarding a possible mandatory site visit will be provided during this meeting and may be scheduled on the same day of the pre-bid conference. Only interested contractors/sub-contractors will be allowed to attend either meeting.
Attendance at this pre-proposal conference is mandatory in order to submit a bid. A representative from your company is required to visit the site to confirm conditions prior to submitting a bid.
All proposals accepted must be in sealed envelopes marked with your company name and “Pebblebrook High School New Gym, Theater and Addition, RFP P1520. For mailing purposes, please address your proposal to CCSD, Procurement Services Department, 6975 Cobb International Blvd., Kennesaw, Georgia 30152, Attn: Chris McSpadden.
Proposal Documents may be reviewed at the Office of the Architect and at the CCSD Procurement Services Dept.
In order to be eligible to respond to this RFP, Contractors must pre-qualify as outlined in CCSD Board Administrative Rule FGC-R, which is available on the CCSD website, www.cobbk12.org by selecting “Board” link then “Policies and Rules” link. The deadline for submitting pre-qualification requirements for this project is 3:00 PM on February 25, 2020. Contractors must provide proof of previous job experience within 30% of the cost of this project. CCSD will consider the submittal and respond within five (5) days if the submittal is not accepted.
Contractor’s Qualification statements should be addressed to: CCSD, Procurement Services Department, 6975 Cobb International Blvd., Kennesaw, Georgia 30152. Attn: Chris McSpadden or via email to: [email protected].
00021 RFP P1520 – Pebblebrook High School New Gym, Theater and Addition REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL INVITATION Cobb County School District
For Inquiries Regarding the Proposal Documents:
All communications concerning these documents must be submitted in writing to the Cobb County School District (CCSD) Procurement Services Department either by email, facsimile, or U.S. mail. Email is the preferred method of communication. Email correspondence is to be directed to Chris McSpadden at: [email protected]. Fax correspondence is to be sent to 770 426 3371. Correspondence sent by U.S. mail is to be sent to CCSD Procurement Services Department., 6975 Cobb International Blvd., Kennesaw, Georgia 30152, Attn: Chris McSpadden.
Only written inquiries received via email, fax, or U.S. mail by 3:00 PM on February 25, 2020. will be considered. Responses to all written inquiries will be posted to the Current Solicitations page on the Cobb County School District website at http://www.cobbk12.org/centraloffice/Purchasing/CurrentSolicitations.aspx
Proposal documents will be issued by:
The Architect: Cooper Carry Jessica Boone 191 Peachtree Street NE, Suite 2400 Atlanta, GA 30303 Phone: 404-237-2000 Email: [email protected]
to all interested parties upon receipt of a request accompanied by a non-refundable check made payable to the issuing party above in the amount of:
$ 1,300.00 per set for hard copies $ 200.00 per set for soft copies
Proposal documents will be shipped postpaid, as soon as possible. Proposals will only be accepted from companies that have purchased bid documents from the Architect.
Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis stated in the Instructions to Offerors. No proposal may be withdrawn for a period of 60 days after proposal opening.
Proposals must be accompanied by a bid bond made payable to the Cobb County School District, in the amount equal to 5 percent of the proposal price. (Certified Checks Not Acceptable.) The successful offeror will be required to furnish a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond acceptable to the Cobb County School District in an amount equal to 100 percent of the contract price and executed by a Surety Company licensed to do business in the State of Georgia and listed in the Department of the Treasury Circular 570, latest edition. The Surety Company shall have an A.M. Best Company minimum rating of "A-" with a financial size of VII "7" or better. Bonds must be accompanied by letter stating bonding company's current rating for verification prior to acceptance by the Owner and execution of the formal Owner/Contractor agreement. Additionally, the Cobb County School District requests that all responses be submitted in electronic form via flash/thumb drive or CD. PDF format is acceptable unless otherwise stated.
Bonding of Subcontractors: Include in the Base Proposal, Performance and Labor and Materials Payment Bonds, each in 100% of the subcontract sum, for each Subcontractor having a contract of $50,000.00 or more for Roofing, HVAC, Plumbing, Sprinkler System and Electrical Work as required by the General Conditions.
00021 RFP P1520 – Pebblebrook High School New Gym, Theater and Addition REQUEST FOR PROPOSAL INVITATION Cobb County School District
Contractor and Subcontractors shall require the Attorney-in-Fact who executes bonds on behalf of sureties to attach a certified, current copy of his Power of Attorney.
Cobb County School District reserves the right to award the project on whatever basis is in the interest of the Owner and to accept or reject any or all proposals and to waive technicalities and informalities.
BY: Cobb County School District David Odom, CPPO Director of Procurement Services
DATE: February 3, 2020 END OF SECTION 00210-1 09.22.2009 SPECIFIC DATE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE CCSD
SECTION 00210
SPECIFIC DATE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION:
A. Work Included: A Specific Date Construction Schedule for the project is stated here-in. Dates for Items 1 through 4 may be considered preliminary until such time as Item No. 3 "Notice of Award" is made.
B. If dates for Items 2 and 3 are maintained, then the dates for Items 4 through 9 become a fixed Construction Schedule.
C. If the Notice of Award date moves forward, then all subsequent dates for Items 4 through 9 shall move forward by the same number of days, unless otherwise stated in an Addendum. If the Notice of Award date is moved back, then all subsequent dates for items 5 through 9 shall remain the same, unless otherwise stated in an Addendum.
PART TWO - EXECUTION
2.01 GENERAL: The schedule dates for the project shall be adhered to and are the last acceptable dates unless they are modified by change order. All dates indicate midnight unless otherwise stipulated. All work affecting an existing facility shall be accomplished during non class time. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all emergency egress routes in accordance with governing code criteria and security for the building.
2.02 PHASING: If the project has phases of work with different Substantial Completion dates, the Contractor shall obtain a separate building permit for each Phase to allow separate inspections and a Certificate of Occupancy to be issued for each Phase.
2.03 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE:
1. ADVERTISEMENT FOR BID: February 3rd, 2020
2. BID DATE & TIME: March 4th, 2020, 3 pm
3. NOTICE OF AWARD: April 17th, 2020
4. CONTRACT AGREEMENT DATE: April 16th, 2020
5. START OF CONTRACT TIME: April 27th, 2020 (10 DAYS AFTER NOTICE OF AWARD OR ON NOTICE TO PROCEED DATE; WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)
6. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: July 15th, 2022 6.A. THEATER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: July 15th, 2021
7. ACTUAL DAMAGES OR LIQUIDATED DAMAGES BECOME EFFECTIVE ON ITEM 6:
8. FINAL COMPLETION: September 30th, 2022 8.A. THEATER FINAL COMPLETION: September 30th, 2021
9. ACTUAL DAMAGES OR LIQUIDATED DAMAGES BECOME EFFECTIVE ON ITEM #8
END OF SECTION
01101-1 02-05-2013 ALTERNATES CCSD
SECTION 01101 ALTERNATES PART ONE-GENERAL
1.01 BIDDING REQUIRMENTS
CCSD may use deductive alternates to reduce the base bid on state- funded projects using the design/bid/build construction delivery method; however, the deductive alternates shall be bid prioritized and exercised in numerical sequence as used in the bid documents. When the CCSD determines that deductive alternatives must be selected, all bids will be recalculated removing the deductive alternates to be taken. The low bid shall then be determined on the base bid less any deductive alternates.
The plans and specifications shall indicate if the project will be awarded by base bid or base bid plus selected alternates. Additive alternates may be exercised in any order. If the plans and specifications state that the contract will be awarded on base bid, then additive alternates are considered only after the low base bidder has been declared. If the plans and specifications state that the project will be awarded by base bid plus additive alternates, all bids will be recalculated adding the additive alternates to be taken. The low bid shall then be determined on the base bid plus the selected additive alternates.
1.02 DESCRIPTION:
A. An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders, and stated on the Bid Form, for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
B. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.
C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: 1. Materials and methods to be used in the Base Bid and in the Alternates have been described on the Drawings and in pertinent Sections of these Specifications. 2. Method for stating the proposed Contract Sum is described in the bid form.
1.03 All alternates described in this Section are required to be reflected on the Bid Form as submitted by Bidders. Do not submit Alternates other than as described in this Section.
1.04 If the Owner elects to proceed on the basis of one or more of the Alternates, the Contractor shall make all modifications to the work required in furnishing and installing the selected Alternates to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner other than as proposed on the Bid Form.
1.05 All Alternates must be executed with an appropriate response. A "blank space", or a "No Bid" statement is inappropriate. The space must include a "Specific Sum" or a "No Change in Price" statement. Failure to provide this information may be cause for rejection of the bid at the Owner's discretion.
1.06 Proposal amounts for Alternates shall remain open for acceptance by the Owner for (60) sixty days after the Notice of Award date.
1.07 If liquidated damages are deleted by Alternate, Addendum or Change Order, completion time remains unchanged and time is still the essence of the contract and in lieu of liquidated damages the Owner retains the right to pursue the collection of actual damages for delayed completion, pursuant to the provisions of the contract documents, under existing state statutes and/or law. 01101-2 02-05-2013 ALTERNATES CCSD
PART TWO - SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES:
To be determined on each individual project.
END OF SECTION REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 072100 - 1 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL THERMAL INSULATION #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board. 2. Mineral-wool blanket. 3. Spray-applied cellulosic insulation.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site until just before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD
A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards." Roman numeral designators in ASTM C 578 are assigned in a fixed random sequence, and their numeric order does not reflect increasing strength or other characteristics.
B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 072100 - 2 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL THERMAL INSULATION #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.
C. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV, Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company (The). c. Owens Corning.
2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS
A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Industrial Insulation Group, LLC (IIG-LLC). b. Roxul Inc. c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
2.3 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION
A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, Type I (materials applied with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications), chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling characteristics. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide International Cellulose Corp.; K-13 or comparable product by one of the following: a. Central Fiber LLC. b. GreenFiber. c. Hamilton Manufacturing Inc. d. Nu-Wool Co., Inc.
2.4 INSULATION FASTENERS
A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc. b. Gemco. 2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.
B. Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position with self-locking washer in place. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Gemco. 2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet with each leg 2 inches square. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 072100 - 3 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL THERMAL INSULATION #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation.
C. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches square or in diameter. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc. b. Gemco.
D. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates without damaging insulation, fasteners, or substrates. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. AGM Industries, Inc. b. Gemco.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less.
C. Asphalt Coating for Cellular-Glass Block Insulation: Cutback asphalt or asphalt emulsion of type recommended by manufacturer of cellular-glass block insulation.
D. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation, or that interfere with insulation attachment.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 072100 - 4 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL THERMAL INSULATION #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below exterior grade line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior walls.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION
A. Butt panels together for tight fit.
B. Anchor Installation: Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application. 2. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation. 3. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles.
C. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or dampproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Mineral-Wool Blanket: Install per manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
B. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates. 1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
3.6 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 072100 - 5 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL THERMAL INSULATION #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 072100
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 072100 - 6 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL THERMAL INSULATION #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 095426 - 1 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL WOOD CEILINGS AND WALL PANELS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
SECTION 095426
WOOD CEILINGS AND WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Wood Ceiling System and Wall Panels.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling panels and suspension systems with other construction that penetrates panels ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and fire-suppression system components.
1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of paneling, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations.
C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated.
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Linear pattern. 2. Joint pattern. 3. Ceiling suspension members. 4. Method of attachment.
B. Product Test Reports: For each ceiling panel, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: The Installer shall be a qualified installer with no less than two years of successful experience in installation of suspended ceilings with requirements similar to this Project. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 095426 - 2 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL WOOD CEILINGS AND WALL PANELS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver ceiling panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they are protected against damage.
B. Handle panels, suspension system components, and accessories carefully to avoid damaging units and finishes in any way.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer: All materials supplied by the manufacturer shall be guaranteed against manufacturing defects for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Installer: All work shall be guaranteed for one year from date of Substantial Completion.
1.11 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55percent during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
2.2 WOOD MICRO GRILLE CEILING/WALL SYSTEM
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Architectural Components Group, Inc.; Woodworks Grille or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Acoustical Surfaces, Inc. 2. Rulon International.
B. Assembly: Factory assembled with a frame, backer panel, with optional acoustical insulation.
C. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard finish options.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer’s standard heavy duty 15/16 T-Grid system and other suspension components required to support ceiling units and other ceiling-supported construction. 1. The system shall be suspended with main runners on 2 ft. centers and cross T’s every 4 ft.
B. Attachment Devices: Per manufacturers written recommendations.
2.4 WALL PANELS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Architectural Components Group, Inc.; Suspension System Series 1 or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Acoustical Surfaces, Inc. 2. Rulon International.
B. Locations: As indicated on Drawings. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 095426 - 3 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL WOOD CEILINGS AND WALL PANELS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which linear suspended ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of linear suspended ceilings.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2.2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of ceiling panels, and hangers in accordance with installation instructions.
2.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install ceiling and wall panels in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.
2.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections: Test and inspect completed installations of ceiling panels and suspension system. C. Ceiling panel hangers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
2.5 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, AND REPAIR A. Contractor shall make final adjustments to level or contours. B. Clean exposed surfaces of suspended ceiling panels. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired.
END OF SECTION 095426 REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 095426 - 4 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL WOOD CEILINGS AND WALL PANELS #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS – 20180008
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 096519 - 1 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL RESILIENT TILE FLOORING #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
SECTION 096519
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient vinyl floor tile. 2. Rubber floor tile. 3. Vinyl composition floor tile. 4. Slip-Resistant vinyl composition floor tile.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed, including dye lot, and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated. 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections. a. Size: Maximum 1000 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Owner/Architect. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Owner/Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 096519 - 2 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL RESILIENT TILE FLOORING #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F or more than 85, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
2.2 RESILIENT VINYL FLOOR TILE
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Mannington Mills, Inc.; Color Anchor. 2. Shaw Contract Group; a Berkshire Hathaway company; Joy Squared. 3. Tandus Centiva; a Tarkett company; Contour Series Abstracts.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1700. 1. Class: Class III, Printed Film Vinyl Tile. 2. Type: B, Embossed Surface.
C. Thickness: 0.100 inch.
D. Wear Layer Thickness: 30 mil.
E. Additional Protective Coating: Scratch/Scuff/Stain Resistant Protection 1. Minimum UV Cured Urethane / Polyurethane. 2. Trademark coatings as recommended by manufacturer.
F. LVT Attributes: 1. Slip Resistance: Meet or Exceed ASTM D2047. 2. Dimensional Stability: Meet or Exceed ASTM F2199. 3. Heat and Light Resistance: Meet or Exceed ASTM F1515. 4. STM for Measuring Heat Stability of RF by Color Change: Meet or Exceed ASTM F1514. 5. Chemical Resistance and Staining: Meet or Exceed ASTM F925. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 096519 - 3 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL RESILIENT TILE FLOORING #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
6. Static Load: ASTM F970, Min. 750 PSI. 7. Residual Indentation: Meet or Exceed ASTM F1914.
G. Size: As designated on Architect's schedule.
H. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
2.3 RUBBER FLOOR TILE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Flexco. 2. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 3. Mannington Mills, Inc. 4. Nora Systems, Inc. 5. PRF USA Inc. 6. VPI Corporation.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1344, Class I-A, Homogeneous Rubber Tile, solid color.
C. Hardness: Grade 1, minimum hardness of 85 , measured using Shore, Type A durometer according to ASTM D 2240.
D. Wearing Surface: Molded pattern. 1. Molded-Pattern Figure: Raised discs.
E. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
F. Size: 24 by 24 inches.
G. Colors and Patterns: Match Architect's samples.
2.4 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.. 2. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through pattern.
C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.
2.5 SLIP-RESISTANT VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.
B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through pattern.
C. Wearing Surface: Embossed with 0.020 in. thick pattern layer containing slip-retardant grit .
D. Thickness: 0.125 inch. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 096519 - 4 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL RESILIENT TILE FLOORING #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).
2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content: a. Resilient Vinyl Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L or less. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 096519 - 5 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL RESILIENT TILE FLOORING #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
G. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096519 REVISED FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 096519 - 6 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL RESILIENT TILE FLOORING #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 1 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
4.2 GOVERNING CLAUSE
A. For the sake of brevity these specifications shall omit phrases such as "Contractor shall furnish and install", "unless otherwise indicated or specified", etc., but these phrases are nevertheless implied. Mention of materials and operations requires the Contractor to furnish and install such materials and perform such operations completely to the satisfaction of the Owner.
4.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. One company shall be responsible for the installation of all aspects of the stage equipment in the Auditorium and Black Box Theatre. Work under this section shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, transportation services, supervision, etc., necessary to complete installation of new stage equipment as well as any other items as herein listed, all as described in these specifications, as illustrated on the accompanying drawings; or as directed by the Architect or his Representative. Work includes the following: Motorized Rigging Counterweight Rigging Fire Curtain Stage Curtains & Tracks Pipe Grid(s) Stage Lighting, Dimming & Control System
4.4 SUBSTITUTIONS:
A. Specific fabric and items of equipment are specified by trade names. It has been determined by the Owner that these are the particular items desired by the owner and established a standard of quality, equipment function and/or process. It is not the purpose nor intent of these documents to eliminate competitive bids. In order to allow proper and fair comparison of pricing, contractors are required to submit their base bid price on the specified equipment. A contractor may submit an alternate bid based on equipment different from that specified only if that Contractor has received prior approval in writing from the Owner at least 10 days prior to bid. Accompanying each request shall be a letter specifically detailing each substitution including catalog data, specifications, swatches, operative samples, technical information, drawings, performance and test data, and complete descriptive and functional information to assist in a fair evaluation. Failure to submit any substitution for prior approval or not providing sufficient data for evaluation shall require the exact item specified to be furnished. Owner's approval of a substitution for bid purposes will not relieve the contractor from the responsibility of meeting all specification criteria. If an approval of a substitution is granted, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any and all changes (wiring, power, distribution, support structure, etc.) such substitution shall require.
4.5 DEFECTIVE OR NON-APPROVED MATERIALS
A. Should any stage equipment be found defective, not meeting specifications, or that which has not been approved in writing by the Owner shall, upon discovery (including any time
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 2 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
within the period of the guarantee), be replaced with the specified equipment or material at no additional cost.
4.6 GUARANTEE
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all of the work that is performed under this contract, including all materials, and workmanship, for a period of one (1) year from the date of full acceptance of the work, with the exception of the motorized rigging equipment, which shall be warrantied for three (3) years.
B. Lamps for lighting fixtures shall be guaranteed against failure for thirty (30) days.
C. Nothing in this guarantee shall cause repair or replacement by the Contractor where negligence, neglect or improper operation by the Owner has caused the failure of any equipment installed under this contract.
D. The base bid shall include the cost of yearly inspections required during the three-year warranty period on the motorized rigging equipment.
4.7 DISCREPANCIES
A. All equipment shall be sized to fit properly. The exact measurements are the responsibility of the Contractor. If there are discrepancies in the specifications, the Contractor shall ask for a clarification from the Owner. If no clarification is requested, the Owner's judgment shall rule.
4.8 PRE-APPROVED STAGE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTORS
A. One company shall be responsible for the installation of all aspects of the stage equipment as specified in this section. This shall include but not be limited to all rigging, curtains, tracks, motors and control, stage lighting fixtures, stage/house dimming, and dimming controls and miscellaneous equipment. The following companies have prior approval as STAGE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTORS: 1. Barbizon 404-681-5124 2. Magnum Companies 404-872-0553 3. Stage Front 1-800-736-9242 B. In order to be considered as a Stage Equipment Contractor on this project, each Contractor requesting approval must submit to the Architect at least ten (10) days prior to the date of bid opening a letter expressing his intent to bid. This letter shall include a list of at least five (5) projects of similar size and scope completed by this firm within the last five (5) years. Inspection of one completed installation may be requested by the Architect/Architect's Representative prior to consideration of request to bid. The stage equipment contractor shall have been in business under the same name for five (5) full years preceding the date of this bid doing work similar to the type specified. The decision of the Architect as to the capability of the Bidder to successfully complete and maintain the system, based on this pre-qualification information shall be final.
C. Pre-Bid request letter shall include a statement that all major items of equipment shall be bid and supplied as specified or shall contain details of all proposed substitute equipment for review by the Architect/Architect's Representative. ETCP certification in theatre rigging is required for approval. Verification of this certification must be provided to be considered for approval. Substitute equipment items to include specifications, parts numbers, and details of interconnection to proposed system. The decision of the Architect/Architect's Consultant as to the acceptability of substitute equipment shall be final.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 3 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
D. The Stage Equipment Contractor shall employ only fully trained stage riggers and mechanics, assisted by common laborers, for the erection of the stage equipment. The stage riggers shall be completely familiar with the type of equipment to be installed. A competent Job Superintendent shall be on the job at all times when work is in progress. He shall represent the Stage Equipment Contractor and all directions given by him shall be as binding as if given by the Stage Equipment Contractor. The job superintendent must be ETCP certified in theatre rigging. A copy of the certification must be furnished to the General Contractor prior to the start of the installation.
4.9 ACCEPTABLE EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS
A. For the purposes of establishing a standard of quality desired on this project, the motorized rigging hardware products of Electronic Theatre Control of Middleton, Wisconsin are specified.
B. The stage lighting dimming, relay panels, motorized breaker panels and controls of Electronic Theatre Controls of Middleton, Wisconsin are specified.
C. The stage lighting fixtures and accessories of Electronic Theatre Controls of Middleton, Wisconsin are specified.
D. The fabrics of KM Fabrics of Greenville, South Carolina, Milliken & Co. of Greenville, South Carolina and Georgia Stage, LLC of Atlanta, Georgia are specified.
E. The curtain tracks of H & H Specialties of S. El Monte, California are specified. Automatic Devices Company is approved.
F. The counterweight rigging hardware of Thern Stage Equipment is specified.
G. The Brickhouse Arbor by Thern Stage Equipment is specified.
H. The fire curtain hardware and equipment of Thern Stage Equipment is specified. I. The fire curtain material and related equipment of Thermotex Industries, Inc., Greenville, SC is specified.
4.10 DOCUMENTATION
A. SHOP DRAWINGS: Shop drawings and equipment data sheets shall be submitted to the Owner under general provisions within 60 business days after receipt of a fully executed contract. Failure to comply with this 60 business-day requirement shall be cause for disqualification of the selected Contractor and cancellation of contract without cost to the Owner, on the basis that the selected Contractor does not have the ability or intention to comply with the specifications. Approval of submitted equipment shall be obtained prior to equipment purchasing or fabrication. If shop drawings are rejected, correct and resubmit in the manner as specified. All shop drawing information shall be submitted at the same time; no partial submittal will be accepted. Drawings shall indicate complete details, dimensions, product types and locations of all equipment, clearances required, guides, cables, sets, Contractor fabricated equipment, and all other details required to completely describe the work to be performed. Submittals drawings shall be presented at a scale of not less than 1/8" = 1'-0" for conduit plans, 1/4" for equipment layouts, ½" = 1'- 0" for mounting details, and ½" = 1'-0" for plate and panel details. Each sheet to allow space for approval stamps and have the name of the project, the contractors and/or the supplier's name, address telephone number, and the date submitted. Submit the following items for Owner's approval, prior to fabrication: 1. Stage plan view 2. Stage side section view
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 4 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3. Gridiron layout indicating all stage equipment. 4. Electrical riser diagrams indicating the necessary control wiring for all dimming, distribution, and controls wire tag number for every connection. Show all terminal blocks with wire numbers and location. 5. Plan and elevation views indicating all electrical hardware locations and layout 6. Provide full dimensions for panel layouts with finishes and materials for all custom panels. 7. Details of installation and erection, including adjoining conditions and necessary clearances. 8. Indication by arrow and boxed caption of each variation from contract drawing and specifications, except those indicated as acceptable in specifications or on drawings B. FABRIC SAMPLES: Submit sample books of each fabric specified, containing standard colors available in the quality of the material specified for the Owner's selection of color and approval. More than one color may be selected. After selection, upon request, submit one square foot samples of each material in each color for final review.
C. RECORD DRAWINGS AND DATA: Submit in accordance with General Provisions. Also, within 30 days of final test and completion of the installation, submit the following to the Owner: 1. Three (3) complete sets of "as built and approved" drawings showing systems and elements as installed, including field modifications and adjustments. 2. Three (3) sets of maintenance data including a list indicating replacement parts lists for all items of equipment, wiring diagrams, control diagrams, any and all keys for cabinets, racks, key operated switches etc. and complete operation manuals. 3. Three (3) notarized Certificates of Flameproofing for each fabric used. 4. Three (3) Certificates of Guarantee D. INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL: 1. Stage Lighting System: This contractor or his representative, fully knowledgeable and qualified in systems operation, shall provide twelve (12) hours of instruction to the Owner-designated personnel on the use and operation of this System. Designated instruction times shall be arranged through the Owner. Training shall be divided into (3) 4-Hour Sessions. 2. Motorized Rigging System: This contractor or his representative, fully knowledgeable and qualified in systems operation, shall provide twelve (12) hours of instruction to the Owner-designated personnel on the use and operation of this System. Designated instruction times shall be arranged through the Owner. Training shall be divided into (3) 4-Hour Sessions. 3. Counterweight Rigging System: This contractor or his representative, fully knowledgeable and qualified in systems operation, shall provide twelve (12) hours of instruction to the Owner-designated personnel on the use and operation of this System. Designated instruction times shall be arranged through the Owner. Training shall be divided into (3) 4-Hour Sessions. 4. Fire Curtain System: This contractor or his representative, fully knowledgeable and qualified in systems operation, shall provide three (3) hours of instruction to the Owner-designated personnel on the use and operation of this System. Designated instruction times shall be arranged through the Owner. Training shall be divided into (2) 1.5-Hour Sessions.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 5 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
E. PERMITS: Obtain all permits necessary for the execution of any work pertaining to the installation, excluding building and electrical permits, and conform in all trades with all applicable local codes and with the National Electric Code.
F. CLEAN UP: It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to remove all debris from the building or site caused by his operations to a common trash point or receptacle on the job site, as determined by the Owner. 2. EQUIPMENT 4.1 PRODIGY EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL STANDARDS 1. Each hoist shall be fully tested under full rated load throughout its full travel distance with all its lift lines terminated to the hoist before the hoist is shipped from the manufacturer. Testing shall include: a. Hoist operation b. Hoist/motor speed c. Lift line terminations under load d. Braking and stopping under load e. Load cell functions f. Slack line detection g. Position sensing h. Hoist noise 2. A copy of all testing results must be furnished by the installing contractor to the architect, theatre consultant or owner’s representative at the time of system commissioning. Manufacturers who cannot provide testing results shall not be acceptable. 3. Paint as required under this section shall be the manufacturer's standard finish and color except as noted. 4. All equipment items shall be new and conform to applicable provisions of Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), American Standards Association (ASA), American National Standards Institute (ANSI), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Life Safety Code 01, National Electric Code (NEC) and PLASA. a. Where acceptable equipment items are specified by catalog number only, device shall meet all published manufacturer's specifications. Where quantities or sizes are not given, refer to drawings. Where two or more products are listed, contractor may use either, at his discretion. Equipment shall not be substituted without specific written approval by the Architect under the substitution paragraphs of these specifications. b. All pipe battens shall be fabricated from 1.5" Schedule 40 pipe. c. All turnbuckles and cable clips shall be drop forged. d. All turnbuckles and clips, tracks, chains and other items of incidental hardware shall be furnished plated or painted. Wire rope shall be galvanized. Fasteners, chain, and other miscellaneous hardware shall be either cadmium or zinc plated. e. All materials used in this project shall be new, unused and of the latest design. Refurbished materials are not permitted. f. In order to establish minimum standards of safety, a minimum factor of 8 shall be required for all equipment and hardware used on this project. In addition, the following factors shall be used:
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 6 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
Cables and fittings 10 Design Factor Cable bending ratio 26 times diameter Max. fleet angle 2 degrees Steel 1/5 of yield Bearings Two times required load at full for 2000 hours B. HOISTS 1. Hoists shall be purpose-designed and fabricated for overhead lifting of theatre lights, equipment, curtains and scenic elements, whether used on stage, in the auditorium or other places of public assembly where people shall move beneath the suspended or moving load. The systems shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and safety features that shall be inherent to this equipment; they shall provide an engineered, efficient device for overhead lifting. The mechanical, electrical and safety features of this hoisting and control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by which hoisting systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated. 2. Each wire rope lift line shall adhere to a design factor of 10:1 with an ultimate strength of 7000 pounds. All load path components between the building structure and the batten shall exceed the breaking strength of the wire rope. The motor brake shall be rated at least at 125% of the motor torque. 3. Standard configured hoists shall be capable of supporting a live load as follows: a. General purpose Variable Speed 0-180 fpm, 1200-pound capacity in standard configuration. Powerhead shall measure no more than 24” high x 12” w x 96” long and weigh 700 pounds. b. General purpose 20 fpm 2,000-pound capacity in standard configuration. Powerhead shall measure 24” high x 12” w x 96” long and weigh 700 pounds. c. Stage Electric 20 fpm 2,000-pound capacity in stage electric configuration. Powerhead shall measure 24” high x 12” w x 96” long and weigh 700 pounds. 4. The standard general-purpose hoist shall consist of the following major components: 1) Powerhead, 2) compression tube with beam clamps, loft blocks, lift line and lift line terminations, Rotational Cable Adjuster (ROCA) and 3) pipe batten. 5. The standard stage electric hoist shall consist of the following major components: 1) Powerhead, 2) Compression Tube with beam clamps, cable management system, loft blocks, lift line and lift line terminations Rotational Cable Adjuster (ROCA), 3) pipe batten and power/control distribution strip 6. The hoist shall include the following features: a. A Powerhead containing the following elements: the gear motor, motor brake, load brake, limit switches operating electronics, load sensor, slack line detector, absolute position sensors, cable drum assembly, and wire rope. b. A Compression Tube that prevents hoist system lateral forces from transferring to the building. Hoists or hoisting systems that impose a lateral load on the building shall not be acceptable. c. The hoist shall incorporate a built-in load cell. d. The hoist shall incorporate a built-in slack line sensor. e. The hoist shall include the emergency contactor built into the hoist. 7. The hoist shall be manufactured from UL Listed components and shall be UL Listed and tested as a complete system (not just UL listed parts). C. POWERHEAD
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 7 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. The Powerhead shall be a fully enclosed housing that shall prevent contact with moving and electrical parts and shall provide protection against dirt, dust and debris. 2. For setup and maintenance, the following functions shall be available from the Powerhead: power and operating switches, address setting knobs, limit switch setting knobs, limit switch override button, indicators for power, status and communication. Each of these functions shall be clearly labeled. D. GEARMOTOR AND MOTOR BRAKE 1. The gear motor and motor brake shall be an integral unit from a single manufacturer. It shall operate on 208 Volt or 480 Volt 60 Hz, 3 phase current for fixed speed units and 480 Volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase current for variable speed hoists. 2. The motor brake shall be integral to the gear motor and shall be capable of holding 125% of the motor full load torque. 3. The motor brake shall be electrically actuated to apply and hold braking force. 4. The motor brake shall be magnetically released and held open upon actuation. E. LOAD BRAKE 1. Fixed Speed Hoists a. The rotary disk load brake shall bring the moving load to a complete stop and shall hold the load in position in the event of a mechanical failure of the motor, motor brake or gearbox. b. Noise from the load brake shall be minimally audible at any time in the operational cycle. c. Normal hoist operation shall not be limited by heat or noise caused by the load brake. d. The load brake shall be electrically mechanically released when the load is moving in the up direction. The load brake shall be closed when the hoist has stopped. The load brake shall always be engaged when the load has stopped moving either up or down. When lowering the load, the load brake shall partially disengage to allow and control descent of the batten. The load brake shall remain closed in the absence of rotational torque on the gearbox. 2. Variable Speed Hoists a. The rotary disk load brake shall open upon activation of hoist movement and shall close after the load has come to a stop; it shall hold the load in position. b. Noise from the load brake shall be minimally audible at any time in the operational cycle. c. Normal hoist operation shall not be limited by heat or noise caused by the load brake. d. The load brake shall be electrically mechanically released when the load is moving either up or down. F. WIRE ROPE DRUM 1. Shall wrap up to eight 1/4” diameter 7 x 19 galvanized aircraft (utility) wire rope lift lines up to 75’ long in a compact manner on the cable drum. They shall be managed by a wire rope (cable) keeper integral to the Powerhead. The drum design shall prevent wire rope from tangling or crossing over itself. G. LIMIT SWITCH
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 8 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. A limit switch assembly shall be mounted within the Powerhead for hard “normal” and “ultimate” end of travel limits. Hard end of travel limits shall be set/adjusted at the time of installation aided by an indicator light visible on the bottom panel of the Powerhead cover. Any system that indicates that the limit has been set by audible or tactile means only shall not be acceptable. H. LOAD SENSOR/LOAD PROFILING. 1. A load sensor shall be built into the Powerhead to create a profile of the actual load on the hoist as it travels through its normal cycle. The profile may be changed by “re-training” the profiling system whenever the suspended load is changed on the batten by activating a key-switch operated training cycle on the motor controller. The load sensor shall continuously monitor the load when load sensing is turned on. I. POSITION SENSOR 1. A position sensing system shall be built into the Powerhead to provide accurate position information. The system shall consist of two absolute sensor types that provide accurate position information for each batten at power-up of the system. Hoisting systems that require re-homing shall not be acceptable. J. SLACK LINE DETECTOR 1. The slack line detector shall be built into the Powerhead. When a slack line condition in excess of 15” develops in a lift line, the slack line detector shall remove power from the hoist. The batten shall be allowed to move only in the upward direction to allow removal of the cause of the slack line fault. K. LOCAL USER INTERFACE AT POWERHEAD 1. User interface at the Powerhead control panel at the rear of the hoist shall include: a. Hoist Up/Down Control b. Limit Switch override buttons (tool accessible) c. Address switches d. Status LED’s L. INFORMATION STORAGE WITHIN POWERHEAD 1. Record of severe fault conditions with date and time stamp 2. Record of E-stops, overloads, moves and power cycles 3. Record of travel distance and peak loads since installation/inspection M. COMPRESSION TUBE AND BEAM CLAMPS 1. The Compression Tube shall be a continuous channel of extruded aluminum engineered in conjunction with the beam clamps to neutralize rigging- generated lateral forces on the building. 2. The Compression Tube shall support the system loft blocks. 3. Compression Tube sections shall be joined into a continuous assembly by a pair of dedicated splicing plates at each tube joint. 4. The Compression Tube shall be installed only by means of dedicated beam clamps that allow the Compression Tube to snap into place and to fractionally move horizontally under load. 5. Beam clamps shall be capable of attaching to horizontal beams, joists, truss flanges or flat steel plates measuring from 3/8” thick up to 1” thick and from 4” wide up to 14” wide placed no more than 14’-0” apart. P1200VS, P2000G, P2000E and P3300G Powerheads may be mounted on 3/8” thick x 4” wide or larger steel structures if deemed sufficient by a structural engineer. Support structures
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 9 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
must be deemed sufficient by a structural engineer to support any forces imposed by the hoisting systems. Beam clamps shall accommodate up to ½” vertical misalignment. 6. Hoist systems that do not neutralize hoist generated lateral forces on the building shall not be accepted for this project. N. LOFT BLOCKS 1. Each loft block shall be an assembly of steel side plates, a wire rope idler, sheave, bearings, shaft locked against rotation and support hardware. Each loft block shall be inserted into the slot on the bottom of the Compression Tube. The blocks shall be positioned no closer than 4’-0” from each other, unless muled. 2. Loft block sheaves shall a D:d ratio of 26:1 minimum and contain a pair of press fit sealed ball bearings. Lift lines shall travel in a groove shaped and sized for 1/4” diameter wire rope per the latest edition of the Wire Rope Users’ Manual as published by the Wire Rope Technical Board. The loft block sheave shall be concentric about the hub and shall be evenly balanced for ease of rotation. 3. An idler shall be incorporated into the top assembly of the loft block to guide and support lift lines as they pass the block. 4. Hoisting systems requiring the loft blocks to be mounted directly to the facility structure shall not be accepted for this project. O. LIFTLINE TERMINATIONS 1. Each lift line shall be terminated in the Powerhead via a standard copper oval compression sleeve installed/crimped at the factory. 2. Lift lines shall be terminated at the load hanger with a low-profile Rotational Cable Adjuster (ROCA) ™, thimble and copper oval compression sleeve. The ROCA and cable terminations at the batten shall be installed at the time of hoist installation. 3. Batten trim shall be adjustable up to 6” via the ROCA. 4. Systems utilizing turnbuckles or chain to trim the batten shall not be accepted for this installation. P. HANGERS 1. Raceway hangers shall be specially shaped flat bar that shall support the wire rope termination hardware and secure the raceway and the pipe batten. Q. PIPE BATTEN 1. The pipe batten shall be 1½” schedule 40 grade A, seamless pipe fabricated in the largest possible lengths without splices. Battens of greater length shall be spliced by means of .120 x 1 9/16 dia. DOM tube 18” long with 9” of tube inserted into each half of the splice. The tight-fitting splice tube shall be held in place by a pair of 3/8 x 2 ½” grade 5 hex bolts on each side of the joint. The bolts shall pass through the pipe at an angle of 90° to each other. There shall be two bolts on each side of the joint spaced 1” and 8” from the joint. Alternatively, one pair of bolts on one side of the joint may be replaced with either plug welds or tight-fitting steel rivets. Pipes shall be straight and painted flat black. 2. A safety-yellow batten cap shall be installed at each end of each pipe batten. 3. The manufacturer shall provide up to four self-adhesive labels for each batten on which the rated batten load shall be written by the installer. R. QUICKTOUCH FIXED SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM 1. GENERAL
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 10 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. The entire motor system shall be operated by a QuickTouch fixed speed controller. It shall be purpose-designed and fabricated to manage and operate motors specifically designed for overhead lifting. Each system shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and safety features that shall be inherent to this equipment and shall provide an engineered, efficient device to control the equipment. The mechanical, electrical and safety features of this control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by which motoring systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated. b. The QuickTouch Control System shall consist of a surface, flush or rack mounted primary control panel and up to three remote E-stop stations. c. The motoring system shall also include one QuickTouch Fixed Speed Remote control device with 30’ of flexible cable that may be attached to the system at the QuickTouch control panel. d. The controller shall include the following features: 1) Key operated power switch 2) LCD display for feedback/operating information 3) Key operated motor load profile training/enable switch 4) Latching motor selection buttons with rear illuminated naming tabs 5) Rear illuminated hold-to-operate (dead-man) up and down operation buttons 6) Dedicated E-stop button 7) Outlet for wired remote 8) Optional door 9) Optional rack mount kit e. The control system shall only employ the QuickTouch controller, a power and control distribution infrastructure and the motors. A System that requires separate drive cabinets or motor-starters shall not be acceptable. 2. ENCLOSURE a. The back box and face panel shall be fabricated from 16ga powder coated sheet steel specially formed to provide support for installation as well as support for all components installed within the housing. b. The QuickTouch face panel shall be printed with complete labeling information to identify the function of each of the buttons in the control station. c. The face panel shall identify the system as a QuickTouch controller for stage rigging. d. The face panel shall be shades of grey. The ring surrounding the E-stop button shall be safety yellow and shall be rear illuminated e. The steel panel to which all switches are mounted shall be removable via screws in the surface located underneath the face panel film. 3. LCD SCREEN a. The liquid crystal display shall be purpose designed to communicate all information in human readable text. b. The screen shall be rear illuminated and shall be dimmable. c. During system start up the screen shall show the progress of the motors diagnostics self-tests. Upon completion of the startup sequence the screen shall indicate that the system is “OK” or shall provide specific
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 11 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
information should a fault be detected. Fault conditions shall be reported in human readable text. Systems that report fault conditions in a series of blinking lights shall not be acceptable for this installation. d. When a motor is selected the LCD screen shall readout the motor name or number, its current position above the floor, the amount of weight suspended from the batten, the preset position that is recorded, as well as a bar graph scale that shows the current position of the motor, top and bottom limits and the current weight suspended from the motor. 4. MOTOR SELECTION/OPERATION BUTTONS a. There shall be rear illuminated motor selection buttons. Buttons shall remain illuminated until de-selected. b. Up to four motors may be selected to move at one time. When the up or down button is pushed and held, each motor shall move to its next stop location. If the stop location is the adjustable preset, the motor can be made to continue to travel in the selected direction by releasing and re- pressing the up or down hold-to-operate button until the next stop for the motor(s) is reached. c. A maximum of four motors may move at one time and only in one direction at a time. d. Although four motors moving at one time is the factory default, it shall be possible to increase to eight or reduce to one the quantity of simultaneously moving motors. e. As a backup, there shall be dedicated hardware to detect and disable the system when the user attempts to move more than the configured maximum quantity of motors. f. All buttons shall fit neatly within each of the cover panel cutouts on the controller. 5. KEY SWITCHES a. A key switch shall control power to the control system. The key must be in the lock and the key turned to the on position for the motoring system to operate. b. A separate key is required to turn on the load profiling system. That key must be in the lock and turned to the “ON” position for load profiling to function. c. When load profiling is turned on the motor shall know the amount of weight that is supposed to be supported by the batten at any location in the path of travel. Should the weight exceed or be reduced below the profiled weight by a preset value, the motor shall stop operation until the fault is cleared. 6. SLACK LINE DETECTOR a. The slack line detector is located in the Powerhead. When a slack line condition occurs, it shall cease motor movement and result in a fault message on the LCD screen on the controller. Movement in the upward direction shall be possible to clear the fault. 7. E-STOP a. The E-stop button on the QuickTouch controller shall be a mushroom button with a rear illuminated ring surrounding the button. During normal operation the E-stop button shall be in the out position. An E- stop can be activated via this button by firmly pressing the button in. The button shall latch and immediately cause a class zero stop of all motors in the system. The LCD screen shall report this as an E-stop fault. To continue system operation the E-stop button must be cleared by twisting the button to release the latch. Power to the control station
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 12 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
must be cycled off/on to re-initiate the system. This action shall also initiate a self-test of the entire control system and contactors. b. The illuminated ring around each E-stop button shall be dimmable. The status of the lighted ring shall provide additional information about the state of the system as follows: 1) Ring at low intensity: no motor moving 2) Ring at high intensity: motor(s) moving 3) Ring blinking: system in E-stop condition c. Up to three remote E-stop stations may be connected to the system. Each additional E-stop station shall operate in the same way as the primary E-stop at the QuickTouch control panel. 8. SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS a. Upon energization the control system shall perform an automatic series of diagnostic tests that assure that all system safety functions are working. Should an error in the safety functions be determined, the controller shall report back a fault condition in the LCD display window and shall identify the nature of the fault. b. Monthly, the system automatically shall perform an additional series of diagnostic tests to determine if there are any problems with any portion of the motor control system safety features. In the event of a problem, the controller shall report back a fault condition in the LCD display window and shall identify the nature of the fault. c. Eleven months after a system inspection has been performed, the system shall remind the user to schedule full system maintenance/inspection. The reminder shall remain in the system with a count-down calendar until it is turned off by the factory authorized and trained inspector. d. The installing contractor shall be able to leave contact information within the system. This information shall be displayed at power up and in the event of severe fault conditions. 9. REMOTE CONTROL PENDANT a. An optional remote-control pendant with 30’ long attached cable and plug shall be provided for the system. The remote control must be plugged to the QuickTouch control panel. When the remote control is plugged in the E-stop on the remote is active. Systems requiring “shunt plugs” to bypass an unplugged remote-control connector shall not be acceptable. b. The remote control provides up/down control for those motors that have been preselected at the QuickTouch controller. 10. SYSTEM COMMISSIONING a. It shall be possible to commission basic functionality of the system without a laptop computer or additional software. b. A trained installer shall commission the full system via a laptop computer connected via the built-in USB port in the controller. USB connectivity shall not require special USB drivers. c. Commissioning software shall feature an inspection report generator that allows a step by step inspection of the control system. Upon completion, the system shall generate an inspection report in PDF format. S. FOUNDATION VARIABLE SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM 1. GENERAL
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 13 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. The entire motor system shall be operated by an Electronic Theatre Controls (ETC) Foundation rigging control system. It shall be purpose- designed and fabricated to manage and operate motors specifically designed for overhead lifting. The System shall incorporate mechanical, electrical and safety features that shall be inherent to this equipment and shall provide an engineered, efficient device to control the equipment. The mechanical, electrical and safety features of this control system shall establish the standard of quality, performance and safety by which motor systems of other manufacture shall be evaluated. The controller shall be capable to control up to 48 motors. The controller shall provide two connections for motor communication, supplying up to 24 motors per connection. b. The Foundation control system shall consist of a surface or panel mounted primary controller and up to six optional external E-stop stations. c. The controller shall be UL Listed and shall be fabricated from UL Listed components. d. The Emergency Stop and Hold-To-Run (Dead-man) signals between the control station and the motor starters or drives in the motors shall be hard wired 24 Volt signals. e. Systems that rely on software and bus communications to transmit any of these signals shall not be acceptable. f. Only physical, industrial heavy duty pushbuttons shall create a “dead-man” Signal. The "dead-man" operation is required, so that the operator must be at the console and pressing a button to initiate and continue motion. g. For safety, no movement shall be permitted to be initiated from the touch screen. h. Systems that allow motors to run without an operator actively present at the console shall not be permitted. i. The system shall not contain any permanently moving components (like hard drives or fans) and shall be maintenance free and completely quiet during operation. j. The control system shall only employ the FOUNDATION controller, a power and control distribution infrastructure and the motors. A System that requires separate drive cabinets or motor-starters shall not be acceptable. 2. ENCLOSURE a. The side panels of the control system shall be machined out of solid Aluminum. The thickness shall be no less than ¼’’. b. The wall mount bracket and face panel shall be fabricated from 16ga powder coated sheet steel specially formed to provide support for the installation. c. The control section of the system shall be lockable by rotation of the entire surface. The system shall provide a physical lock, once it is in the closed position d. An optional lockable cover shall be available. e. The Foundation face panel shall be printed with complete labeling information to identify the function of each of the buttons in the control station. f. The face panel shall identify the system as a Foundation controller for stage rigging. g. The wall mount bracket shall be mountable independently from the control station. It shall be possible to run in and terminate all wires on connectors just with the installed wall bracket.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 14 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
h. The entire control panel shall be easy to connect to the wall bracket. All electrical connections shall be made via touch safe connectors. The system shall be closed up by concealed screws. i. A system that relies on directly terminated / non-connectorized building wires to the control system shall not be acceptable. The Foundation controller shall run on 100V to 240V AC 50/60Hz, 2A max Power 3. BUTTONS AND JOYSTICK a. The control system shall include one power button with a power indication LED. b. The control system shall include one readily accessible USB port for the connection of a USB memory stick for the use with show file transfer, inspection reports, log files and software updates. c. The control system shall include two illuminated and dimmable “GO” buttons. d. The control system shall include one proportional joystick 1) The position sensing shall be done by an absolute hall effect encoder 2) Joysticks that rely on analog pots or incremental encoders shall not be acceptable 3) The joystick shall incorporate one dead man button 4) The joystick shall incorporate 2 RGB LED illuminated and dimmable indication areas that allow indication of the direction, function or status of the Joystick. 4. E-STOP a. The E-stop button on the FOUNDATION controller shall be an NFPA-79 compliant mushroom head button with an illuminated ring surrounding the button. b. During normal operation the E-stop button shall be in the out position. An E-stop can be activated via this button by firmly pressing the button in. The button shall latch and immediately cause all motors in the system to stop motion. c. To continue system operation the E-stop button must be cleared at the station where it was pressed by twisting the button to release the latch. The E-stop must be acknowledged at the control station where it was activated before any new movement can occur. d. The operator shall acknowledge the end of an E-stop condition. At that time the control system shall initiate an automatic self-test of the system safety functions including safe opening of all E-stop contactors. e. The illuminated ring around the E-stop button shall change intensity depending on whether the system is moving or not. The transition between low and high intensity shall be a smooth fade. The intensity levels shall be adjustable at the time of installation or service. f. The illuminated ring around the E-stop button shall blink in case of an E- stop condition. g. In addition to the E-stop station at the main control panel, up to six external E-stop stations may be connected to the system. Each external E-stop station shall operate in the same way as the primary E-stop at the FOUNDATION control panel. h. The LCD screen shall report the E-stop as an E-stop condition. i. The report shall indicate if the activated E-stop was the internal one, the one on the remote control or one of the external stations.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 15 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
j. The E-stop system shall be completely hard-wired. A system that relies on software or bus system to transmit E-stop signals shall not be acceptable for this installation. k. The E-stop signal shall be provided in parallel to all E-stop contactors in the motors. A single E-stop contactor failure shall only affect a single motor. l. Serial wiring of the E-Stop signal from motor to motor shall not be acceptable. 5. LCD SCREEN a. The graphic LCD screen shall be a 15’’ full industrial grade graphics type to communicate all information in symbols, colors and human readable text b. The display shall be illuminated. c. The FOUNDATION control system shall employ an ambient light sensor and proximity sensor. d. All intensities of all indicator lights and LCD intensity shall be dimmable and shall automatically adjust based on ambient light conditions. Intensity changes shall be happen in smooth slow fades. e. If the control system is not used for a pre-determined time, the intensities shall dim further down. If the proximity sensor is actuated, the intensities shall dim up again. f. The screen shall employ a multi-touch sensor that allows for gesture control like zooming and scrolling. g. Readout language may be selected to be English, Spanish, French or German. h. It shall be possible to look at all motors or only a sub set, based on a flexi- channel filter. 6. USER ACCESS LEVELS a. Upon completion of the startup sequence the display shall indicate that the system is “OK” or shall provide specific information should a fault occur in the self-test. b. Fault conditions shall be reported in human readable text. Any system that reports fault conditions in a pattern of illuminated lights or a series of blinking lights shall not be acceptable for this installation. c. The FOUNDATION system shall provide at least the following access levels 1) Emergency User 2) User 3) Power User 4) Administrator 5) Commissioning 6) Inspection d. These levels shall be unlocked either by a user name and pin code or via a USB dongle e. It shall be possible to call the manufacturer to retrieve a 3-day temporary access code for any access level for the specific control system. 7. OPERATION a. The LCD screen shall provide a display of the motor name and number, its current position above the floor, the amount of weight suspended from the batten, preset position recorded, as well as a bar graph scale that
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 16 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
shows the current position of the motor and the current weight suspended by the motor. b. Fault conditions shall be displayed in red or orange, depending on the severity of the condition c. Position readout and position entry shall be in feet and inches, in decimal feet or in metric dimensions. d. The weight readout shall be in pounds or kilograms. 8. MANUAL OPERATION a. In manual operation, it shall be possible to select one or multiple motors and then directly move the selected motors by the means of the joystick b. The user shall have the ability to change the name of a motor c. The user shall have the ability to add a comment for each motor d. The user shall have the ability to store the following trims 1) High trim (soft upper limit) 2) Low trim (soft lower limit) 3) 8 intermediate trims 4) 2 system wide trims e. These trims shall be usable as references in presets and cues f. The user shall have the ability to directly enter a numeric target position 9. PRESET OPERATION a. The system shall provide the capability to store presets with numbers ranging from 1 to 999. b. The user shall be able to add individual motors with specific positions to presets c. The user shall be able to name each preset d. The user shall be able to add a comment to each preset 10. CUE STACK OPERATION a. The system shall provide the capability to store cues with numbers ranging from 1.00 to 999.99. b. The user shall be able to add individual motors with specific positions to cues c. The system shall be able to display multiple cues with their stored motors and positions at the same time in spreadsheet type view. d. For each cue, it shall be possible to assign: 1) One total move speed for all motors 2) Different move speeds and wait times for all up- and downwards moving motors. 3) Individual move speeds and wait times for each motor in the cue 4) One total move time for all motors 5) Different move and wait times for all up- and downwards moving motors. 6) Individual move and wait times for each motor in the cue e. It shall be possible to enter a cue playback rate that re-calculates the times or speeds of the cue. f. In playback, it shall be possible to start a selected cue with either one of the two “GO” buttons
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 17 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
g. During playback, is shall be possible to override the playback speed with the joystick. The joystick shall indicate this function via a specific color code. h. On completion of a cue, the next cue shall automatically be loaded i. It shall be possible to start the next cue(s) while the current cue is still running. j. The control system shall display the current cue and additionally several cues and the respective motors, targets, speeds and speeds in a spreadsheet pattern k. The control system shall display the remaining time of a running cue 11. FILE OPERATION a. The control system shall provide the means of storing at least 10.000 different show-files on the internal hard-drive. b. The control system shall provide a means to store and read show-files to/from an USB thumb drive. 12. HELP SYSTEM a. The control system shall provide an online help system embedded in the console. 13. REMOTE CONTROL PENDANT a. An optional remote control pendant with a 30’-0” long attached cable and plug shall be provided for the system. The remote control shall connect to the FOUNDATION control system via a connector on a 2-gang wall- plate. b. The remote control pendant shall provide an up, down and E-Stop button. c. The remote control shall provide up/down control for those motors that have been selected at the FOUNDATION controller. d. When the remote control is plugged in the E-stop on the remote control shall be activated. e. When the remote control is unplugged, the E-Stop system shall seamlessly and automatically bypass the connector. This bypass system shall be achieved by a redundant means and shall be monitored and frequently tested for proper functionality. f. A “shunt-plug” to achieve this function shall not be acceptable 14. REMOTE ENABLE PENDANT a. An optional remote enable pendant with a 30’-0” long attached cable and plug shall be provided for the system. The remote control shall connect to the FOUNDATION control system via a connector on a 2-gang wall- plate. b. The remote enable pendant shall provide and enable and an E-Stop button. c. The connector shall be the same as for the remote control and the same E- Stop bypass principles shall apply. 15. SMART REMOTE CONTROL UNIT a. An optional smart remote control station with a 50’-0’’ long attached cable and plug shall be provided for the system. The remote control shall connect to the Foundation control system via a connector on a Remote Control Connection station. b. The remote control unit shall be made of rugged industrial strength plastic and shall withstand shocks of up to 15g / 11ms (according to EN 61131). c. The remote control unit shall have an IP-65 ingress protection rating.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 18 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
d. The remote control unit shall be ergonomically formed, designed to be held with either hand and operated with the other hand. 1) The diameter of the remote control unit shall not exceed 250mm and the height including grip shall not exceed 125mm, 2) The weight of the remote control unit shall not exceed 1,5kg e. The screen shall be a full color 6.5’’ touch screen, with a resolution of 640x480 pixels. f. The unit shall be supplied with 24V DC and shall communicate by Ethernet and by hardwired 24V signals for E-Stop and Dead-Man. g. Physical buttons 1) The front face of the unit shall provide a number of physical user buttons next to the screen: (i) Numeric buttons for value entries (ii) Navigation buttons (iii) Function buttons 2) An illuminated white Go Button shall be provided. The illumination shall indicate a loaded and ready to run cue or target move. 3) An E-Stop button shall be provided on the front of the unit h. Proportional Joystick 1) A proportional joystick shall be provided on the remote control unit. (i) The user shall be able to manually move motors up and down with this joystick. (ii) The user shall be able to proportionally control the motor movement speed during target moves or cues with this joystick. i. User function 1) The remote control unit shall be accessible with multiple access levels that are configured on the Foundation control system. 2) The user shall be able to see on a simultaneous overview of all motors in the system with status, position and load information. 3) The user shall be able to see the system time and the loaded show on the screen 4) The user shall be able to select one or several motors from the touch screen. 5) The user shall be able to manually move one or multiple motors up and down with the joystick 6) The user shall be able to enter a target position for a motor and move that motor to this target position 7) The user shall be able to store up to 8 user trims and two user limits for each motor 8) The user shall be able to see detailed status information of a selected motor 9) The user shall be able to recall presets and move associated motors to positions stored in these presets
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 19 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
10) The user shall be able to recall cues from the cue stack and start these cues with the go button j. The remote control unit shall provide a dual channel hard wired E-Stop button k. The remote control unit shall provide two 2-Step hard wired Dead man buttons 1) The first step when pressed with normal force shall activate the system for normal motion 2) When the user applies strong actuation force, the dead man button shall activate the second step and disable the dead- man circuit. l. Connection box 1) The remote control connection box shall be manufactured from solid sheet metal. 2) The remote control connection box shall provide a power switch with a power status LED built in. 3) The remote control connection box shall provide a high and a low voltage wiring chamber, separated by a grounded metal divider 4) The remote control connection box shall provide a power supply for the remote control 5) The remote control connection box shall provide a field Ethernet wire punch down termination means. 6) The remote control connection box shall provide termination means for the hard wired dead man and E-Stop circuits 16. SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS a. Upon energization of the control system shall automatically perform a series of diagnostic tests that assures the proper functionality of all system safety functions. Should an error in the safety functions be determined, the controller shall report back a fault condition on the LCD display and shall identify the nature of the fault in human readable text form. b. Should the controller be continuously energized, the system shall automatically perform a series of diagnostic tests every 30 days to determine if there are any problems with any portion of the motor control system safety features. In the event of a problem, the controller shall report back a fault condition on the LCD display and shall identify the nature of the fault in readable text form. c. The automatic self-tests shall include a complete test of all Emergency Stop contactors for their respective ability to turn off. d. Eleven months after a system inspection has been performed, the system shall remind the user to schedule a full system maintenance/inspection. The reminder shall remain visible in the system until it is turned off by the factory authorized and trained inspector. e. All faults and failures shall be displayed on the control station as a color indication of the respective motor and additionally as clear text. f. The system inspection reminder shall show the number of days remaining until the system inspection, or the number of days the inspection is overdue. g. A failure of the Load Cell, Encoders or a wiring issue shall be automatically detected during machine standstill and motion.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 20 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
h. Motor, brake resistor or drive over-temperature shall be detected and shall stop the motor. i. The motor direction shall be detected and the system shall automatically be stopped if the command direction differs from the actual movement direction. j. A failure of the chain between the drum and the limits shall create a fault condition and stop the motor. k. The number of simultaneous moving motors shall be limited in the control system in order to reduce the maximum dynamic load to the building structure. 1) The system shall trip out the control system if more than the allowed amount of motors are about to start to move 2) This system shall react before the motors start to move to avoid even the initial startup load impact 3) The setting for this limit shall allow a granularity of 1 motor increment. 4) This system shall be executed in pure hardware. 5) This system shall have redundant software back up. 6) Systems that solely rely on software to achieve this function shall not be acceptable. 17. MONITORING AND MOTOR HISTORY a. The system shall automatically keep track of system and motor history. b. Each fault condition shall be logged with a time and date stamp. Logging of the motor events shall continue to function while the main control station is turned off or while the motor is not connected to the rest of the system. c. The control system shall keep a record of the distance traveled and peak load for each motor. There shall be separate entries of this data for “Since the last inspection” and “Since time of manufacture.” d. The data shall be accessible during inspection. It shall be downloadable in an Excel readable file format. e. A control system that does not provide logging shall not be acceptable. 18. CONFIGURATION a. The control system shall provide all configuration software “on-board”. b. It shall be possible to configure all motor functions through the control system at the control panel. A system that requires an additional computer or laptop connected to the motor or the system shall not be acceptable for this installation. c. The configuration software shall allow easy and simple configuration of the system by factory trained and authorized installers. 19. INSPECTION a. On-Board software shall allow easy and quick annual inspection of the control system functions by a factory trained and authorized inspector. 1) The inspection software shall automatically provide inspection relevant data to the inspector, such as peak load and travel distance. 2) The software shall guide the inspector through a number of inspection tasks. 3) The software shall automatically recognize safety relevant signals (E-stop, Limit Switches).
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 21 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. The inspection software shall automatically fill in an inspection report and generate a PDF file that can be stored on a USB thumb-drive. c. The inspection report shall include a 2D barcode that encodes a copy of the inspection data and a checksum that can be utilized to validate the inspection report. 20. INSTALLATION a. GENERAL 1) Installation of this equipment shall only be performed by ETC approved and factory trained theatrical rigging installers. Installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner and shall strictly adhere to the standards of these specifications and ETC’s installation requirements. Where necessary, the installer may make adjustments to accommodate unforeseen impediments to installation. The completed work must achieve all electrical, safety and appearance requirements as established in these specifications. 2) Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes. 3) On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with advanced approval from the architect or Owner’s representative. 4) DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES (i) The RIGGING contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing: (a) Powerhead (b) Compression Tube, Compression Tube splices and Compression Tube beam clamps (c) Loft blocks (d) Wire rope lift lines and terminations (e) On electrics line sets: Cable Management system for distribution raceways, including low-voltage, ground and data wiring (f) On electrics line sets: Factory prewired electrical termination boxes that are part of the cable management system. (g) On electrics line sets: Factory prewired distribution raceway mounted at the bottom of the wire rope on the stage electrics sets (h) Pipe batten attached to RACAs or Hanger Brackets (i) Batten end caps (j) Batten labels (k) Attachment of the prewired twist-lock connector to the Power and Control Distribution outlet (l) Attachment of the prewired circular pin connector data wire to the mating outlet on the Powerhead and on the Power and Control Distribution box
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 22 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(m) Termination of the low voltage data wiring at the controller and at all power and control distribution boxes and at each E-stop station (n) Face plates for all Control Stations, E-stop Stations and Power and Control Distribution Boxes (o) Set limit switches (ii) The ELECTRICAL contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing: (a) All pipe, wiring and termination providing line voltage to all the Power and Control Distribution boxes (b) All pipe and wiring connecting data lines between the first Power and Control Distribution Box and the Control station (c) Pipe and wiring connecting data lines between Control Station and first E-Stop Station (d) All pipe and wiring connecting data lines between all E-Stop Stations (e) Back boxes for all Power and Control Distribution Boxes, the Control Stations and all E-Stop Stations (iii) The GENERAL contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing: (a) All structure, beams, bracing, in-fill and other structural devices/means/materials to support and from which to suspend ALL rigging equipment and devices. (b) All bridges, galleries, gang-ways, walk-ways, ladders, stairs and surfaces necessary for access to and operation of the rigging equipment and devices.
T. CABLE MANAGEMENT FOR ELECTRICS 1. PRODIGY CABLE MANAGEMENT for ELECTRICS a. The load circuits and control wiring shall be fed to the connector strip by a built-in cable management system that allows flat feeder cable to fold and store along the top of the connector strip. 1) At high trim, the entire system shall be stored in 30” of vertical space from the bottom of the mounting steel to the horizontal centerline of the batten. Cable management systems requiring greater vertical storage space shall not be acceptable for this project. 2) The cable management system shall be integral to the hoist system. 3) The cable management system shall be UL LISTED. 4) The flat cable shall meet the physical as well as thermal requirements of UL for 20-amp loads. Up to four flat cables may be fed from each end of the distribution system to provide power for 24 circuits from each end of the system for a maximum of 48 circuit’s total.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 23 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
5) Each flat cable shall include one ground wire and one data cable plus an individually insulated hot and an individually insulated neutral conductor for each of six 120 Volt 20 Amp circuits. 6) The connector strip shall be built to the length specified with outlets or pigtails located as specified or as shown on the construction drawings. Outlets or plugs shall be 15-amp grounded pin connectors, 15-amp twist lock connectors, or 15 amps Edison plugs. The connector strip may also contain connectors for Ethernet and/or DMX connections. 7) Flat cable shall pass through a strain relief before entering a termination box at the designated end of the raceway. Within the raceway all wiring shall be attached at the factory to a terminal block. The flat cable, internal wiring and all components shall meet UL requirements and appropriate National Electrical Codes (NEC). 8) Cable management systems that utilize cable cradles, cable reels or locate feeder or data cables outside the off-stage edges of the electrics batten shall not be acceptable for this project. 9) Hoisting systems utilizing cable management systems from third-party vendors shall be fully integrated into the hoisting system without additional structural changes or changes to the Foundation controller. Electrics line set hoisting systems that do not fully integrate cable management in the hoisting system and controller shall not be acceptable for this installation. Cable management systems that are not UL LISTED shall not be accepted for this installation. 2. CONNECTOR STRIP—DISTRIBUTION a. The connector strip shall be a formed sheet metal wire way, made from 18 ga. steel. b. The system incorporates all outlets, wire and internal terminations to provide power and control as required on drawings. c. The connector strip shall be powder coated. d. Circuit wiring shall be supplied to the connector strip trough via an ETC Prodigy cable management system. U. POWER AND CONTROL DISTRIBUTION RACEWAYS (PCD-R) 1. Each hoist shall receive power and control via a pair of 8’-0” long jumper cables extending from the Powerhead to the source outlets. Receptacles shall be installed in a sheet metal junction box or trough with outlets. Each outlet shall be located no more than 6’-0” away from the rear face of each hoist. 2. Each Powerhead shall include a power cord hardwired to the hoist with an appropriately sized twist lock connector at the PCD end and a removable control cable with a circular 9 pin connector at each end. Inclusion of a 20- amp 3 phase breaker in the PCD is optional. The wiring and connectors shall be barriered between high and low voltage. 3. Provide PCD raceway as shown on drawings. 4. The power/distribution channel shall be UL LISTED for this application. V. INSTALLATION 1. GENERAL
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 24 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. Installation of this equipment shall only be performed by ETC approved and factory trained theatrical rigging installers. Installation shall be performed in a workmanlike manner and shall strictly adhere to the standards of these specifications and ETC’s installation requirements. Where necessary, the installer may make adjustments to accommodate unforeseen impediments to installation. The completed work must achieve all electrical, safety and appearance requirements as established in these specifications. b. Work shall be performed in accordance with OSHA and local codes. c. On site welding shall only be performed per AWS D1.1 standards and with advanced approval from the architect or Owner’s representative. d. DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITIES 1) The RIGGING contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing: (i) Powerhead (ii) Compression Tube, Compression Tube splices and Compression Tube beam clamps (iii) Loft blocks (iv) Wire rope lift lines and terminations (v) On electrics line sets: Cable Management system for distribution raceways, including low-voltage, ground and data wiring (vi) On electrics line sets: Factory prewired electrical termination boxes that are part of the cable management system. (vii) On electrics line sets: Factory prewired distribution raceway mounted at the bottom of the wire rope on the stage electrics sets (viii) Pipe batten attached to RACAs or Hanger Brackets (ix) Batten end caps (x) Batten labels (xi) Attachment of the prewired twist-lock connector to the Power and Control Distribution outlet (xii) Attachment of the prewired circular pin connector data wire to the mating outlet on the Powerhead and on the Power and Control Distribution box (xiii) Termination of the low voltage data wiring at the controller and at all power and control distribution boxes and at each E-stop station (xiv) Face plates for all Control Stations, E-stop Stations and Power and Control Distribution Boxes (xv) Set limit switches 2) The ELECTRICAL contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing: (i) All pipe, wiring and termination providing line voltage to all the Power and Control Distribution boxes (ii) All pipe and wiring connecting data lines between the first Power and Control Distribution Box and the Control station
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 25 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(iii) Pipe and wiring connecting data lines between Control Station and first E-Stop Station (iv) All pipe and wiring connecting data lines between all E- Stop Stations (v) Back boxes for all Power and Control Distribution Boxes, the Control Stations and all E-Stop Stations 3) The GENERAL contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing: (i) All structure, beams, bracing, in-fill and other structural devices/means/materials to support and from which to suspend ALL rigging equipment and devices. (ii) All bridges, galleries, gang-ways, walk-ways, ladders, stairs and surfaces necessary for access to and operation of the rigging equipment and devices. 4) All pipe and wiring and all terminations of line voltage of dimmed and non-dimmed circuits that terminate at the termination boxes mounted on/near the Compression Tube. The ELECTRICAL contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing
(i) All pipe, wiring and termination providing line voltage to all the Power and Control Distribution boxes (ii) All pipe and wiring connecting data lines between the first Power and Control Distribution Box and the Control station (iii) Pipe and wiring connecting data lines between Control Station and first E-Stop Station (iv) All pipe and wiring connecting data lines between all E- Stop Stations (v) Back boxes for all Power and Control Distribution Boxes, the Control Stations and all E-Stop Stations (vi) All pipe and wiring and all terminations of line voltage of dimmed and non-dimmed circuits that terminate at the termination boxes mounted on/near the Compression Tube.
4.2 STAGE DIMMING AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A. GENERAL 1. Electrical requirements of the Stage Equipment Contractor: The Stage Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for providing to the electrical contractor all stage lighting and dimming hardware as specifically detailed in these specifications. This shall include: a. Furnishing all equipment specified. b. Hanging of connector strips over stage on specified stage rigging hardware. c. Set-up of the control console. d. Demonstration of equipment to owner's representatives. e. Lamping & hanging all stage lighting fixtures. f. All low voltage lighting control terminations.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 26 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2. The Stage Equipment Contractor shall not be responsible for the following work; to be performed by the electrical contractor.: a. Any conduit b. Any wiring c. Power requirements and termination of same in dimmer rack d. Any load wiring, fixtures, or termination at fixtures for house lighting or emergency lighting e. Mounting of plugboxes, floor pockets, back boxes and gridiron junction boxes (locations to be coordinated with stage equipment contractor) 3. FACTORY CHECK-OUT: This contract shall also include the services of a qualified engineer regularly employed by the manufacturer of the system who shall check the installation and ensure its proper operation. No part of the system shall be energized before being so checked and the installation approved. Failure to observe this provision shall automatically relieve the manufacturer of any responsibility concerning the proper operation of the system or any part thereof and the replacement of parts which may have been damaged by the premature energizing. This engineer shall be made promptly available on the job site within fourteen (14) days after the manufacturer has received written notice. B. CONTROL ENCLOSURE – ERN2 1. The control enclosure shall be the Unison ERn Series Control Enclosure as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. 2. Mechanical a. The External Processing enclosure shall be a surface mounted panel constructed of 18 gauge formed steel panels with a hinged, lockable full-height door containing an integral electrostatic air filter. 1) The enclosure door shall have an opening to allow limited access to the control module face panel. 2) Enclosures shall be convection cooled without the use of fans. b. Control Enclosures shall be sized to accept one or two Control Processors and one or two Station Power Modules, including various options and accessories. 1) The Control Enclosure for a single control processor (ERn2) shall support a single Station Power Supply module; The Control Enclosure for 2 control processors (ERn4) shall support a quantity of 2 modules. c. All enclosure components shall be properly treated and finished. 1) Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine textured, scratch resistant, powder-based epoxy paint. d. Enclosure(s) shall also be available in a 19” rack mounted (RM) version. 1) Rack-mounted version shall have an independent enclosure suspension kit, with a full height, locking door/cover attached to the kit. 2) Rack-mounted version shall have an opening to access the control module face panel, and openings to view indicators on option modules. e. Enclosure dimensions and weights (without modules) shall not exceed: 1) ERn2 - 15" W x 9" H, 10" D, 15 lb. 2) ERn2-RM - 19" W 11"H 10" D, 20 lb. 3) ERn4 - 15" W x 14" H x 10" D, 20 lb.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 27 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
4) ERn4-RM - 19" W x 16" H x 10" D, 25 lb. f. Top, bottom, and side knockouts shall facilitate conduit entry. g. Enclosures shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of all control and option modules without the use of tools. 1) Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of modules into power and signal connector blocks. 2) With modules removed, enclosures shall provide clear front access to all power and control wire terminations. h. Option Modules 1) Ethernet Switch (i) The Control Enclosure shall support an optional 5-port Ethernet Switch, with at least 4 ports supplying Power over Ethernet (PoE). (ii) The Ethernet Switch module shall be 100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af PSE compliant. (iii) The Ethernet Switch module shall contain power, status, and activity indicators. All indicators shall be visible when the enclosure door is open for both rack and wall mounted ERn. 2) Redundant Power Supply (RRPS) (i) The Control Enclosure shall support an optional redundant power supply which shall automatically provide power to the control electronics upon failure or removal of the primary power supply. (ii) The redundant power supply shall assert itself seamlessly without a loss of power to the control electronics. (iii) The redundant power supply shall seamlessly remove itself when the primary power supply is reengaged. (iv) The redundant power supply shall provide visible indication that it is active. 3) Station Bus Repeaters (ERn4 only) (i) The Control Enclosure shall support an optional module to expand the station bus length an additional 400 meters, and the station count an additional 30 stations (60 maximum per processor/enclosure) (ii) Wall-mount and 19" Rack-Mount versions shall also be available to support mid-span insertion away from the Control Enclosure. 4) Station Bus Dual Repeaters (ERn4 only) (i) The Control Enclosure shall support an optional module to expand the station bus length to two additional 400-meter segments (a total of 1200 meters from a single enclosure, and the station count to 60 stations (60 maximum per processor/enclosure). (ii) Wall-mount and 19" Rack-Mount versions shall also be available to support mid-span insertion away from the Control Enclosure. i. Accessories 1) RideThru Option (RTO)
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 28 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(i) The Control Enclosure shall support an optional, short- term back-up power source for the control electronics. (ii) RideThru Option (RTO) provides power for controls electronics during brief power outages or drop outs. (iii) The short-term back-up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself. (iv) The short-term back-up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power. (v) The short-term back-up power source shall support the control electronics for at least 10 seconds. 2) BatteryPack Option (BPO) (i) The Control Enclosure shall support an optional, long- term back-up power source for the control electronics. (ii) The long-term back-up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself. (iii) The long-term back-up power source shall supply power to the control electronics for at least 90 minutes. (iv) The long-term back-up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power. (v) A test switch/indicator shall be available without opening the rack door or removal of any modules/components. 3. Electrical a. External Processing enclosures shall be available in 100, 120, 230 and 240- volt, single-phase configurations. b. External Processing enclosures shall be completely pre-wired by the manufacturer. The contractor shall provide input and control wiring. c. External Processing enclosures shall be designed to support the following wire terminations: 1) AC (single phase) 2) Echelon link power (Belden 8471 or equivalent) 3) 24Vdc (2- 16AWG Wire) 4) DMX512A Port A (In or Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent) 5) DMX512A Port B (In or Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent) 6) RS232 Serial In/Out (Belden 9729 or equivalent) 7) Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5 Ethernet 8) Contact Closure In (14AWG to 26AWG Wire) 9) Contact Closure Out (14AWG to 26AWG Wire) (i) Contact Closure Out shall provide 1A @ 30vDC d. Station Power Modules
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 29 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) Station power supply modules shall provide LinkPower for at 32 stations and 1.5A@24VDC of Auxiliary (AUX) power. 2) Station power repeater modules shall provide LinkPower for 30 stations and1.5A@24VDC of Auxiliary (AUX) power. 3) Station power module shall support over-current/short protection for LinkPower and Aux. LinkPower shall support fault detection on each leg of the balanced data bus. e. All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors. 4. Thermal a. Ambient room temperature: 0-40°C / 32-104°F b. Ambient humidity: 10-90% non-condensing C. Unison DRd Series Rack Enclosures 1. Rack Enclosures a. The rack enclosure shall be the Unison DRd Series Control Enclosure as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. b. Mechanical 1) The Rack Enclosure shall be a surface mounted, deadfront switchboard, constructed of 18-guage formed steel panels with a hinged, lockable full-height door containing an integral electrostatic air filter. (i) Filter shall be removable for easy cleaning. (ii) The enclosure shall support one control processor and one station power module plus accessories (iii) The enclosure door shall have an opening to allow limited access to the control module face panel. 2) All rack components shall be properly treated and finished. (i) Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine textured, scratch-resistant, epoxy paint. 3) The fully digital rack enclosure shall be available with six or twelve dimmer module spaces, one processor and a single station power supply, Rack dimensions and weights (without modules) shall not exceed: (i) DRd6 21.9” H x 17” W x 9.6” D 38 lb. (ii) DRd12 31.0" H x 17” W x 9.6” D 51 lb. 4) A single low-noise fan shall be located at the top of each rack. The fan shall draw all intake air through the integral electrostatic air filter, over the surfaces of the module housing and out the top of the rack. (i) The fan shall maintain the temperature of all components at proper operating levels with dimmers under full load, provided the ambient temperature of the dimmer room does not exceed 40°C/104°F. (ii) In the event of an over-temperature condition, only the affected dimmer module(s) shall shut down. A red indicator LED will flash and an error message shall appear on the Control Processor. 5) Rack Enclosures shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of dimmer and control modules without the use of
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 30 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
tools. (230 volt racks with CE certification shall require a screwdriver.) (i) Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of modules into power and signal connector blocks. (ii) With modules removed, racks shall provide clear front access to all load, neutral and control wire terminations. 6) Rack Enclosures shall support use of any combination of rack option cards designed to provide additional rack features. Rack option cards shall include: (i) FLO - The Fluorescent Option Board shall provide termination for 4 wire low voltage electronic fluorescent dimming ballasts. FLO shall provide 24, 0-10Vdc outputs. (ii) DALI - The DALI Option Board shall provide termination for DALI fluorescent dimming ballasts. DRd shall provide 24, DALI outputs for up to 63 ballasts each in a broadcast mode. 7) Optional floor mounting pedestal shall be available for the 12- module rack. 8) Racks enclosures shall be designed for use with AX series auxiliary racks for Main Circuit Breaker, Main Lug, and cross bussing applications. 9) Accessories (i) RideThru Option (RTO) (a) The Rack Enclosure shall support an optional, short-term back-up power source for the control electronics. (b) The short-term back-up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself. (c) The short-term back-up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power. (d) The short-term back-up power source shall support the control electronics for at least 10 seconds. (ii) BatteryPack Option (BPO) (a) The Rack Enclosure shall support an optional, long-term back-up power source for the control electronics. (b) The long-term back-up power source shall automatically engage upon the loss of normal power, seamlessly transitioning the supply power for the control electronics power to itself. (c) The long-term back-up power supply shall detect the return of normal power, and seamlessly return the control electronics to normal power.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 31 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(d) A test switch/indicator shall be available without opening the rack door or removal of any modules/components. (e) The long-term back-up power source shall supply power to the control electronics for at least 90 minutes. c. Electrical 1) Rack enclosures shall be available in 100, 120, 230, 240 and 277 volt, three-phase, main lug configurations. (i) 120 volt rack enclosures shall be field configurable for single phase operation without the need for additional components 2) Rack enclosures shall be completely pre-wired by the manufacturer. The contractor shall provide input feed, load, and control wiring. 3) Standard Short Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR) shall be 22,000 at 100-277 Volt (i) Higher SCCR ratings, up to 100,000 amps SCCR at 120V, shall be possible when used with an AX series Auxiliary Rack Enclosure. (ii) Higher SCCR ratings, up to 65,000 amps SCCR at 240V and 277V, shall be possible when used with an AX series Auxiliary Rack Enclosure. 4) All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors. 5) Rack enclosures shall support dimming for incandescent, fluorescent, neon, cold cathode, electronic low voltage and magnetic low voltage transformer load types. 6) The rack enclosure shall support 16-bit DMX input 7) The rack enclosure shall support 65,000 steps of dimming. 8) The rack enclosure dimming engine shall support multiple dimmer curves including modified square law, linear, switched, fluorescent, pre-heat and electronic low voltage. 9) The rack enclosure shall support voltage regulation including, minimum and maximum scale voltages with offsets 10) Rack enclosure shall support a UL924 listed contact input for emergency lighting control bypass. (i) Emergency lighting input shall support load shedding 11) Rack enclosures shall be designed to support the following wire terminations: (i) AC (ii) Echelon link power (Belden 8471 or equivalent) (iii) 24Vdc (2- 16AWG Wire) (iv) DMX512A Port A (In or Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent) (v) DMX512A Port B (Out) (Belden 9729 or equivalent) (vi) RS232 Serial In/Out (Belden 9729 or equivalent) (vii) Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5/5e Ethernet (viii) Contact Closure In (14AWG to 26AWG Wire)
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 32 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(ix) Contact Closure Out (14AWG to 26AWG Wire) (a) Contact Closure Out shall provide 1A @ 30vDC 12) Station Power Modules (i) Station power modules shall provide power for the connected control bus. Options shall be available for use with Paradigm, Echo and SmartLink control protocols (ii) Station power modules shall support over-current/short protection (iii) Station Power Modules shall support fault detection for the data bus. 13) All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors. 14) Main feed lugs shall accept a maximum of 350 MCM wire. 15) Load terminals shall accept a maximum of #6 AWG wire. d. Thermal 1) Ambient room temperature: 0-40°C / 32-104°F 2) Ambient humidity: 10-90% non-condensing D. ARCHITECTURAL CONTROL PROCESSOR MODULES 1. The Architectural Control Processor shall be the Unison Paradigm P-ACP Series Control Processor as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. 2. The Architectural Control Processor (ACP) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series Dimming Enclosures and ERn Series Control Enclosures. 3. The processor shall utilize microprocessor based, solid state technology to provide multi-scene lighting and building control. a. ACP shall support functions such as station programming, macro sequencing, electronic lockout, room combine and astronomical time clock events. ACP station processor shall allow configuration of the control system via the menus. See software section for additional system details. b. When used in a dimming enclosure, the ACP shall allow access to dimming control menus including the status screen, dimming configuration screen, backup menu, test menu and configuration menu. c. One ACP shall be rated to drive 1024 channels of control, 1024 zones, 64 rooms, 512 presets, 62 button or button/fader stations and 6 Touchscreen Stations 4. ACP module electronics shall be convection cooled. 5. The ACP shall provide front-panel RJ45 jack, Secure Digital (SD) card slot, and Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port for configuration and data exchange. 6. Architectural Lighting System configuration and program information shall be stored in flash memory, which does not require battery backup. 7. The ACP shall be contained in a plug-in assembly and require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be terminated into Dimming or Control Enclosure. a. The ACP shall support the following communications: 1) Echelon LinkPower 2) 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af compliant Ethernet networking with TCP/IP, ESTA BSR E1.17 Advanced
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 33 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
Control Networks (ACN) and ESTA BSR E1.31 (sACN) Protocols 3) EIA-232 serial protocol 4) ESTA DMX512A, configurable as input or output ports 5) Dry contact closure inputs 6) Dry contact closure outputs, rated at 1A@30VDC E. STATION POWER MODULES 1. The Station Power Module shall be the Unison Paradigm P-SPM Series Station Power Module as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. 2. Mechanical a. The Station Power Module (SPM) assembly shall be designed for use in DRd Series or ERn Rack Enclosures. b. The SPM shall convert input power into low-voltage (Class II) power with data line and a secondary auxiliary low-voltage line to energize button, button/fader, touchscreen, and interface devices for multi-scene lighting and building control. c. SPM module shall be contained in a plug-in assembly. 1) The module shall be housed in a formed steel body and contain no discrete wire connections. (i) No tools shall be required for module removal or insertion. d. The SPM shall be convection cooled. e. User Interface 1) The SPM shall utilize light emitting diodes (LED’s) to indication function, status and fault. f. The SPM shall be secured behind the locking door. g. Wall-mounted, direct wire and 19” rack-mount, connectorized repeater and dual-repeater variants shall be available from the same manufacturer where required on the project. 3. Electrical a. The SPM shall require no discrete wiring connections; all wiring shall be terminated into the dimming enclosure, unless required by a variant. b. The SPM shall require line-voltage power supplied by the contractor, terminated inside the dimming or control enclosure. c. The SPM shall be hot-swap capable. d. The SPM, in conjunction with a matching Architectural Control Processor (ACP), shall support Echelon LinkPower communications with remote devices, including button, button/fader, touchscreen and interface stations, and shall interoperate with LonMARK-approved third-party devices. 1) The LinkPower network shall utilize polarity-independent, low-voltage Class II twisted pair wiring, type Belden 8471 (unshielded) or Belden 8719 (shielded) or equivalent. One # 14 AWG drain wire will be required for system not using grounded metal conduit. 2) The LinkPower network shall be topology free. Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 34 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3) Link power wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) (i) Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) (ii) Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m) 4) Link power wiring between stations shall not exceed 1313 ft. (400m). e. The SPM shall support auxiliary power for certain remote devices, including touchscreen and interface stations, as required by the device. 1) The auxiliary power network shall utilize polarity-dependent, low-voltage Class II wiring, consisting of two # 16 AWG wires. 2) Auxiliary wiring shall permit a total wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) (i) Repeaters allow an additional wire run of 1640 ft. (500m) (ii) Dual-repeaters allow two additional wire runs of 1640 ft. (500m) 3) The SPM shall supply 1.25 amps at 24v DC continuously. 4. Functional a. Capacity 1) Each SPM shall: (i) Supply power for up to 32 button and button/fader stations. (ii) Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow 30 additional stations, 62 total (iii) Supply auxiliary power for a similar number of interface stations. (iv) Shall supply auxiliary power for up to four Touchscreen stations, when a like number of other stations are deducted from the total. (v) Repeaters and dual-repeaters allow two additional Touchscreens (six total) when a like number of other stations are deducted from the total. b. Operation 1) The SPM shall not require configuration or programming. 2) The SPM shall automatically detect faults in the wiring, indicate the fault, including the fault polarity, and shut down the output power. (i) The SPM shall automatically reset when the fault is clear and can be manually reset by removing and re- inserting the module. F. POWER CONTROL SYSTEM – SENSOR 3 1. General a. The installation rack shall be the Sensor3 120V as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. The Power Control System enclosure shall consist of up to 48 module spaces. 2. Electrical
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 35 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. Sensor3 racks shall operate at 120V, three phase, four wire + ground, 47- 53 or to 57-63 Hz at 800 amps max. Other voltage and phase options are available upon request. Sensor racks shall automatically compensate for frequency variations during operation. Provisions shall be made for optional amp trap devices for fault current protection. Standard SCCR fault current protection shall be 100,000A. b. All load and neutral terminals shall accept up to #4 AWG (25mm2) wire. Systems providing smaller terminals do not allow contractor wire sizing flexibility and shall be deemed unacceptable. c. Load terminals shall be located at the front of the wiring cavity. Front access racks having terminals located at the back of the rack or on the side near the back of the rack such that adjacent load cabling may block terminal access shall not be acceptable. 3. Electronics a. Power control electronics (CEM3) shall be contained in a single module that can be plug-in capable without use of tools. Power control and dimming systems that require tools for removal of control electronics shall not be acceptable. b. All data and power input for CEM3 control electronics shall be located on a separately removable/pluggable termination connector on the backplane such that backplane can be replaced without removal and discrete secondary conductor terminations. Systems that require discrete termination of DMX, Ethernet, power input, and dimmer control output directly on terminals on the control module or pluggable backplane shall not be permitted. c. The power controller shall directly support the following network protocols: 1) Net3 protocol suite including ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN) 2) ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) (i) Systems that do not support the above listed industry standard ACN protocols for Ethernet setup, control and feedback integrated directly between the power system and control system shall not be deemed acceptable. d. The power controller shall directly support 2 ports of control input using ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A e. Control signals shall be sent between control module and dimmer/power modules using flat ribbon cables. Systems using cat5 cable and rj45 connections or discrete hand wired conductors as sole physical communication media between control module and dimmer/power modules shall be considered long term unreliable and shall be not be acceptable. f. System shall provide an optional low voltage connection to maintain power of control electronics through brown out, instantaneous, and sustained power outages. Systems that do not provide optional low voltage backup power connection to the power controller shall not be acceptable. g. Control electronics shall be housed in a formed steel body with cast- aluminum face panel. 4. Physical a. The Sensor3 rack shall be a free-standing, dead-front switchboard, substantially framed and enclosed with 16 gauge, formed steel panels.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 36 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
All rack components shall be properly treated, primed and finished. Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine-texture, scratch-resistant, epoxy paint. Removable top and bottom panels shall facilitate conduit termination on the 48 module rack. Knockouts shall serve the same purpose on 12 and 24 module racks. b. Sensor3 racks shall be available in three sizes, with the following dimensions. 1) SR3-12 (12 module) 25.8”H x 14.8”W x 13.3”D 2) SR3-24 (24 module) 45.8”H x 14.8”W x 16.8”D 3) SR3-48 (48 module) 83.1”H x 14.8”W x 22.8”D c. Racks shall be designed for front access to allow back-to-back or side-by- side installation. d. Racks shall be designed to allow easy insertion and removal of all modules without the use of tools. Supports shall be provided for precise alignment of modules into power and signal connector blocks. With modules removed, racks shall provide clear front access to all load, neutral and control terminations. Racks that require removable panels to access load, neutral or control terminations shall not be acceptable. e. An optional bus bar kit shall be available from the factory to allow adjacent racks to be powered by a single line feed. No soft buss rack- to-rack wiring shall be required. Racks that require discrete cabling to connect adjacent racks shall not be acceptable. f. Module spaces shall be mechanically keyed to accept only the 20A or below, 50A, or 100A module specified for that space. Racks that allow modules of varying wattages to plug into the same space shall not be acceptable. The rack shall be configurable to accept mixed dimmer types and sizes throughout the rack. g. Each rack shall provide a lockable full-height door containing an integral electrostatic air filter that shall be removable for easy cleaning. A single low-noise fan shall be located at the top of each rack. Design of the rack and modules shall draw all cool air intake air through the integral electrostatic air filter at the front of the rack, discretely through each module housing and directly out the top of the rack such that exhausted hot air from adjacent modules does not heat the module(s) above, below, or to the side of each other. System designs that draw the same heated air through multiple modules shall not be acceptable. h. The fan shall maintain the temperature of all components at proper operating levels with dimmers under full load, provided the ambient temperature of the dimmer room does not exceed 40°C/104°F. Racks that do not employ both locking doors and electrostatic air filters shall not be acceptable. i. The fan shall turn on whenever any circuit in the system is activated. In the event of an over-temperature condition, only the affected dimmer module(s) shall shut down and a message shall appear on the control module LCD. The fan shall remain on during thermal shutdown of individual dimmer modules. Systems that do not include over- temperature sensing and preventative thermal shutdown shall not be acceptable. j. A fan sensor shall be provided. In the event of momentary fan failure, error message will be displayed and sent remotely over Ethernet to optional
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 37 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
logging systems. Systems that do not provide optional system event logging shall not be deemed acceptable. k. If the ambient room temperature drops below 0°C/32°F or rises above 40°C/104°F, a warning shall appear on the dimmer rack LCD. If the temperature rises above 46°C/115°F, the rack shall shut down until the condition is corrected. l. A 3 x .5-inch LED status indicator (beacon) shall be mounted in the rack door. The beacon shall be visible throughout a wide viewing angle. In normal operating conditions, this LED is illuminated. If the rack’s control module senses an error condition, the beacon shall flash until the error is corrected. An optional indicator shall be available for remote locations. Racks have no external means of visually showing that an error is present shall not be acceptable. G. POWER CONTROL ELECTRONICS – CEM3 1. General a. The Power Control electronics shall be contained in one plug-in Power Controller. Each power controller shall plug into a dimming cabinet with no need for tools or discrete wire connections. A simple user interface shall be provided for group configuration, testing and diagnostics. The Power Control System shall be Sensor 3 as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. b. Power control shall be UL/cUL Listed and CE Marked. Power and dimming control that require tools for removal of control electronics shall not be acceptable. 2. Physical (Control Interface) a. The control electronics shall be contained in one plug-in module, housed in a formed steel body with cast-aluminum face panel, and self-retaining ejection handles to ease removal from the rack. b. A backlit eight-line by 20-character graphical LCD shall be provided for system configuration, live control and status display. c. The following features shall be available in power control to reduce setup and tech times: 1) Full number pad shall be provided for quick access to dimmers. Power Control that does not provide 0-9 number pad and logic keys for AND, THRU, and AT for fast access, selection, and control of circuit/dimmer numbers shall not be acceptable. 2) Power control shall provide NEXT and LAST buttons to progress through individual circuits/dimmers during pre- show lighting checks for lamp burnouts. 3) Shortcut buttons for Setup, About and live control shall be provided. These functions shall be separated in such a way that user intending to check status or settings does not accidentally render their system unusable. These buttons shall also serve to reduce maximum time to access any feature or setting on a single dimmer, range of dimmers or an entire rack. (i) Power control that does not include the above features shall not be acceptable. d. The front panel shall have five status LED indicators: power, network activity, DMX A, DMX B, and panic state. 3. Control Signals and Physical Communications Media ports
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 38 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. The power control shall be provided with an Ethernet control signal input. This input shall be fully configurable with a range of patching and priority programming capabilities. The Ethernet signal shall supply seamless integration between the dimmer racks and both the entertainment and architectural lighting control systems. The Ethernet signal shall also enable remote configuration, playback, file storage and monitoring features on a personal computer on the network. Dimming systems that require Ethernet to DMX translation devices for control of critical show lighting introduce a potential failure point and shall not be acceptable. b. All data and power input for control electronics shall be located on a separately removable/pluggable termination connector on the backplane such that backplane can be replaced without removal and discrete secondary conductor terminations. Systems that do not support tool-less replacement or that require removal of wires connected directly to the control electronics shall not be acceptable. c. Dimming systems that require discrete termination of DMX, Ethernet, power input, and dimmer control output directly on terminals on the power control or pluggable backplane shall not be acceptable. d. DMX connections shall be available with option for pluggable screw or punch-down type terminal. Systems that do not allow this option do not support both DMX over CAT5 and mule-strand conductors shall not be acceptable. e. Ethernet connection shall be available via standard Cat5 RJ45 connection. System requiring punch down direct to rack or controller cannot be Cat5 system certified and shall not be acceptable. f. Power Control shall provide a convenience Ethernet uplink to the lighting network at the front face of the control module. Network capable 3rd party control and monitoring devices shall be provided full access to control, editing and real time feedback. g. The following options shall be available to backup all controller setup UL924 Panic configuration, and recorded presets: 1) Automatic backup in non-volatile backplane memory 2) Automatic backup in non-volatile Controller memory 3) 3rd party FTP server 4) USB storage device pluggable on the controller face panel 5) Data shall also be transferable to and from library storage on a personal computer on a per-rack basis h. Power Controller shall support Class 2 EchoConnect control communications 1) The control network shall utilize unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). Use of Category 5, or better, control network wiring shall also be supported. 2) The control network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these i. The control network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these j. The power controller shall directly support the following network protocols: 1) Net3 protocol suite including ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN)
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 39 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) 3) Systems that do not support the above listed industry standard ACN protocols for Ethernet setup, control, and feedback integrated directly between the power system and control system shall not be deemed acceptable. k. The power control shall directly support 2 optically isolated ports of ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A for control input. Minimum 2,500V of optical isolation shall be provided between the DMX512 inputs and the electronics. Systems that do not have optical isolation on a prewired factory plug-in device shall not be acceptable. 4. Power Control Features a. The power control shall automatically compensate for frequency variations during operation. b. Dimmer outputs shall exhibit no oscillating or hunting for levels. Dimmers with the same choke type set to the same level shall output within ±1V of each other, regardless of phase or input voltage. c. Power control shall maintain proper dimming performance for all line feed frequencies from 47-53Hz and 57-63Hz without flicker or misfire. Shifts in frequencies up to 3 Hz shall not result in flicker or loss of dimming timing. Systems that cannot perform to these frequency tolerances and shifts shall not be acceptable. d. Dimmer output levels shall be regulated for incoming line voltages. The regulation shall adjust for both RMS voltage changes and deformations in the incoming AC waveform. The power control shall monitor and adjust each dimmer's output to maintain a constant power to the load. Regulation shall maintain the desired output voltage ±1V for the entire operating range (91-139V and 181-259 VAC) with the exception that the maximum output will be no greater than the line voltage minus dimmer insulation loss. The regulation shall compensate for dips and anomalies in the AC waveform on a dimmer-by-dimmer basis. There shall be no interaction between dimmers in the system or any other equipment. The output shall be nominally regulated to 115V/230V appropriate for the market, but shall be field adjustable on a dimmer-by-dimmer basis to allow for varying cable length. Systems that cannot maintain perform to the above stated voltage regulation shall not be acceptable. e. Power control shall support a rack filled with different types and sizes of dimmer modules. The properties of each dimmer shall be configurable, including dimmer name, output curve, dimmer firing mode, and scale voltage values. 1) The output curve selections shall include IES Modified Square, Square, Linear, Modified Linear and a Sensor v2.0 output curve. The power control shall also have the capability of storing up to three custom curves as well as an adjustable preheat level, assignable on a per-dimmer basis. 2) Circuit control modes shall include: Always on, Dimmable, Dimmer Doubled, Switched (unregulated on/off with adjustable on-at level), Fluorescent with adjustable threshold and Off. 3) Power Control shall support forward or reverse phase firing of appropriate modules. 4) Dimmers set as Dimmer Doubled shall allow a single dimmer to set two different levels on one dimmer circuit by
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 40 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
splitting the AC power into positive and negative half cycles with no resultant DC line current. 5) Power Control that does not support all above listed adjustments to dimmers on a per circuit basis shall not be acceptable. f. User programmable parameters shall support onsite setup via the local interface in the rack. These parameters shall include, but not be limited to, defining module type, scale voltage for each dimmer, firing mode, curve, dimmer numbering, and DMX512/sACN network port assignments. Systems requiring factory programming shall not be acceptable. g. Hardware settings for rack type, available module types, availability of AF features, and operating voltage shall be configurable at the factory or in the field, and shall not require secondary setup after system commissioning even in the event of power controller replacement. h. Controller shall support two methods of automatic configuration during controller replacement in a rack. 1) Use backplane configuration: The backplane shall retain full setup and preset data in. In this recovery mode, when a new power control is inserted, the controller shall automatically come on-line fully functional without any manual intervention. 2) Use controller configuration: Override backplane configuration such that replacement modules automatically use the configuration resident in nonvolatile memory of the power control. i. Controller shall be capable of changing rack setup for multiple shows for an entire system with a single update command from a remote PC. j. In the event of data loss each rack shall maintain the last level for a user-programmable time (zero to five minutes or indefinitely) or may be programmed to fade out or to play a specific preset. Systems that do not offer this feature shall not be acceptable. k. The power control shall contain diagnostic routines to allow the user to test and troubleshoot the system. The power control shall also contain a Test/Bypass switch to turn all dimmers on to full for testing. This switch shall bypass all electronics and shall force the fan on. Systems that do not include local control, “all on” control bypass, and diagnostic routines shall not be deemed acceptable. l. The power control shall be able to record up to 64 presets in a rack. Presets shall be user programmable by recording a snapshot of current dimmer levels (as set by the all control sources), by entering dimmer levels on the power control directly or by a combination of both methods. The system shall have the ability to program and activate group-wide presets from the power control, remote station, console, networked computer or handheld device. Presets shall be activated in the default fade time of 2 seconds, but shall be have a user-programmable fade time between 0 and 60 minutes. m. A system-wide panic (emergency UL924) activation circuit shall be provided. Any dimmer in any rack may be assigned to the panic circuit. The panic closure shall be maintained. Upon activation the system shall: 1) Force all circuits selected to be included in panic to a master level between 80-100% 2) Optionally force all non-panic dimmers to zero
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 41 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3) Provide configurable fade time to and from “emergency” state 4) Provide configurable delay to and from “emergency” state n. DMX A and B as well as the Ethernet DMX (EDMX) data may be patched using a rack start address - assigned sequentially from a starting control channel or patched individually on a per-dimmer basis. Priority may be set per universe for the DMX inputs, and set per universe by the control source for Ethernet input. Each dimmer may have up to six network control inputs with either a highest takes precedence or priority patch. Each dimmer may also then be assigned to one of 16 spaces for additional specific preset control. Each preset shall have a separate priority for maximum flexibility of prioritization. Systems that do not support prioritization of multiple Ethernet sources beyond HTP shall not be acceptable. Systems that do not support the above listed flexibility in control source prioritization shall not be acceptable. o. Power control shall provide the ability to set a single circuit, all circuits or a range of circuits to a level at the control interface in the rack. Systems that cannot locally control dimmers through local control override shall not be acceptable. p. The power control shall be capable of monitoring and displaying incoming line voltage for all three phases on the LCD. With installed current sensors, the same display shall show amperage on each phase. q. The power control shall support security protected access. The user shall to able to program passwords that restrict access, preventing unauthorized use of higher-level functions by unauthorized personnel. Systems that do not provide security protected access to features that can render the system unusable shall not be acceptable. r. Advanced Features (AF) option shall add an additional sensor in the individual dimmer modules. This option shall allow monitoring of current and output voltage on a dimmer-by-dimmer basis and provide information on lamp burnouts, dimmer status and input voltages. s. Power control shall allow the user to record the loads of all AF dimmers in the system. The power control shall, during operation, test each AF dimmer, determine its load and compare it to the recorded load. Any change from recorded loads of configured tolerance shall display an error on the power control and any monitoring device on the network. If a dimmer is driven on with no load, an optional message shall be available to notify the console operator and electrician that there is no load. 5. Connect to Console Communications a. The Ethernet network shall provide an integral link to connect all racks in the system for remote rack-to-console and rack-to-network device communication of the below listed features of real-time control, configuration, and status/feedback using industry standard ANSI E1.17 ACN lighting protocol. Power control and dimming systems that do not use this protocol shall not be permitted. Reported system errors shall be given ACN access to be cleared remotely at the console with exception of system critical errors that require a person to go directly to the rack to manually clear the exiting fault. b. Control 1) E1.31 sACN control 2) Activate/Deactivate rack presets 3) Set/Unset circuit levels as overrides to Preset, DMX, and sACN control
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 42 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
4) Lock relays into On/Off/Remote switching states without patching to a console. 5) Lock dimmers into non-dim mode with On/Off/Remote switching states without patching to a console. c. Remote console configuration shall include, but not be limited to, real time reporting and editing the following: 1) Circuit’s control mode (i) Dimmable (ii) Switched (iii) Latch-lock (iv) Always on (v) Off (vi) Fluorescent 2) Curves 3) Control threshold 4) Min Scale Voltage 5) Max Scale Voltage 6) Preheat 7) Scale load d. Standard rack feedback - Rack status messages shall include, but not be limited to, real time reporting of the following: 1) Identification (i) Rack type (ii) Rack name (iii) Rack number 2) State of UL924 panic closure 3) DMX port A or B has an error or has failed 4) Network has an error or has failed 5) Phase A, B or C is below 90 volts 6) Phase A, B or C is above 139 volts 7) Phase A, B or C did not start because it was outside of allowable voltage ranges at power up 8) Phase A, B or C voltage headroom warning 9) Frequency is not 50 or 60 Hz 10) Ambient temperature is below 0C/32F 11) Ambient temperature is above 40C/104F 12) System Critical-Ambient temperature exceeds 46C/115F 13) Configuration memory error 14) Run hours remaining before rack filter needs to be cleaned 15) IP address of the controller in the rack 16) Software version of the controller in the rack e. Standard branch circuit feedback - Ethernet console access of the following circuit status shall be provided: 1) Module type 2) Circuit location
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 43 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3) Patched circuit addresses 4) Output level 5) Control Source 6) Overtemp f. Advanced branch circuit feedback - Dimmer Specific status messages shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1) Load has dropped below recorded value 2) Load has raised above recorded value 3) DC detected on dimmer output 4) One SCR has failed on/off 5) Dimmer has failed off or circuit breaker has tripped 6) Dimmer has been removed 7) Dimmer load has failed 8) Dimmer has shut down due to over temperature H. THRUPOWER MODULES 1. General a. The modules shall be Sensor3 ThruPower modules as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. Sensor modules shall be designed for complete flexibility of choice for dimmed, non-dim, or hot power on each 20A branch circuit. A single ThruPower module shall provide: 1) Two dimmed outputs with choice of 500 or 350 us rise times, controlled by DMX, or 2) Two air gap relay switched outputs controlled by DMX, or 3) Two manual bypass constant power circuits controlled manually b. The module may be configured to operate as two dimmers, two relays, or any combination of relay and dimmer from the CEM3 Power Control Module or from an ETC control console connected to a CEM3 system. Any single circuit may be set to bypass the dimmer using a switch on the front of the module. 2. Status Reporting a. The power control system shall report circuit specific errors via the rack control electronics and/or via a lighting control console. b. Modules shall provide the following status reporting functions: 1) Load dropped below recorded value 2) Load increased over recorded value 3) DC on dimmer output 4) SCR failed on/off 5) Circuit breaker tripped 6) Dimmer error 7) ThruPower module removed 8) Load absent 3. Electrical a. Each ThruPower module shall contain 1) two circuit breakers
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 44 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) SCR solid-state dimming 3) toroid filters 4) power and control connectors 5) 120VAC remotely controllable mechanically latching air gap relay 6) Low voltage dc manual bypass override switch 7) 1 fuse per branch circuit for sufficient short circuit rating b. Modules that use Triac dimming shall not be acceptable. Modules which utilize an SCR or triac solid state switch as a dimmer bypass may void warranty of products they are powering and shall not be an acceptable means of bypass. c. Modules shall not have any protruding pins subject to physical damage when the module is not installed. d. Modules shall be keyed so that modules of different capacity shall not be interchangeable. e. Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic so the trip current is not affected by ambient temperature. Circuit breakers shall be rated for tungsten loads having an inrush rating of no less than 20 times normal current. Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent switching duty applications. Dimmers that do not operate continuously at 100% load shall not be acceptable. 4. SCR Assembly a. Each module shall use a solid state module (SSM) consisting of two silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCRs) in an inverse parallel configuration, and all required gating circuitry on the high voltage side of an integral, opto-coupled control voltage isolator. Rectifiers, copper leads and a ceramic substrate shall be reflow soldered to an integral heat sink for maximum heat dissipation. The SSM shall also contain a control LED, a thermistor for temperature sensing, and silver-plated control and load contacts. The SSM shall include an integral output LED, output voltage sensors and current sensors for feedback to the control module. The SSM shall provide a parallel output connection which completely bypasses all SCR dimming including toroid filters and shall intercept the output prior to connection of the load sensing circuit such that the advanced features are still active during bypass. The entire SSM shall be sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a screwdriver to replace. Dimmers employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or other isolating devices not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation, shall not be acceptable. Modules requiring disassembly, heat sink grease or additional tools for repair shall not be acceptable. b. All electronic components (current/voltage sensors and indicators) shall be contained in a single, field-replaceable housing. Modules requiring discrete wiring of electronic components shall not be acceptable. c. SCR power switching devices shall have the following minimum ratings:
Module Size: 20A 50A 100A Single cycle: 625A 1,200A 2,300A Peak surge current Half cycle: 1,620 4,150 22,000 12T Transient 600V 600V 600V over voltage
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 45 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
Die size (in) .257 .394 .570 5. Filtering a. Modules shall include toroid filters to reduce the rate of current rise time resulting from switching the SCRs. The filter shall limit objectionable harmonics, reduce lamp filament sing and limit radio frequency interference on line and load conductors. Modules shall offer 350 or 500uS filter rise times. Rise time shall be measured at the worst case slew rate (approximately 50 percent) from 10 to 90 percent of the output wave form with the dimmer operating at full load. b. All dimmers shall maintain their published rise time and/or fall time regardless of duty cycle or rack temperatures. Dimmers that de-rate due to increased dimmer temperature caused by full load operation or high phase angles shall not be acceptable. 6. Performance a. Power efficiency for standard dimmers shall be at least 97 percent at full load with a no-load loss of 3V RMS. The dimmer shall accept hot patching of a cold incandescent load up to the full rated capacity of the dimmer. 7. Physical a. Modules shall be fully plug-in and factory wired. Modules shall consist of a heavy duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools shall be required for module removal and insertion. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine-texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy powder coat. With the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. Each module shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name, catalog number and rating. Modules constructed of molded plastic for structural support are not equivalent and are not acceptable. Modules shall be UL Recognized.
I. RELAY MODULES 1. General a. The Relay modules shall be the ETC Relay modules as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. The relay modules shall be designed for dependable, economical service in theatrical, architectural, and video applications for use with theatrical and architectural lighting and motorized equipment. 1) Relay modules shall be compatible with both Sensor Dimming Systems and Unison Dimming Systems b. Relay module configuration shall be dual channel, 100/140V, 15A or 20A, as noted on the Electrical Drawings. c. Relay modules shall be fully plug-in and factory wired. The modules shall consist of a heavy duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with integral face panel. No tools shall be required for module removal and insertion. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine-texture, scratch resistant, gray epoxy powder coat. With the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. Each module shall be labeled with the manufacturer's name, catalog number and rating. Modules constructed of molded plastic for structural support are not equivalent and are not acceptable. Relay modules shall be UL and cUL listed power control devices with a minimum AIC rating of 10,000A.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 46 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
d. Modules shall have a fully magnetic circuit breaker for each channel. Relay modules shall be rated for a minimum of 100,000 full load activations. e. Modules shall have Signal and Load LED indicators for each channel. f. Relay modules shall be available with ETC Advanced Features providing load and status information. J. ELECTRONIC LOW VOLTAGE DIMMER MODULES 1. General a. The Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Dimmer Module as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. (ETC) shall provide Reverse Phase Control dimming for electronic low-voltage transformers. b. The ELV module shall be a dual density, fully rated dimmer 1) ELV10 modules shall provide two 10A dimmers, with each dimmer rated for 1.2kW at 120V. 2) HEL5V modules shall provide two 5A dimmers, with each dimmer rated for 1.2kW at 240V. 3) AELV5 modules shall be dual 5A modules, with each dimmer rated for 1.4kW at 277V c. The module shall be UL and cUL Listed for continuous duty at 100% of rated load. 2. Mechanical a. ETC dimmer modules shall be designed for use with Unison or Sensor dimming racks. b. Dimmer modules shall consist of a heavy-duty, die-cast aluminum chassis with an integral faceplate. All parts shall be properly treated, primed and finished in fine-texture, scratch-resistant gray epoxy powder coat. c. With the exception of the circuit breaker, the module shall contain no moving parts. d. Each module shall be labeled with the manufacturer’s name, catalog number and rating. e. All electronic components (current/voltage sensors and indicators) shall be contained in a single field-replaceable housing. 3. Electrical a. Each dimmer shall consist of the following components: 1) Two single-pole circuit breakers (i) Circuit breakers shall be fully magnetic to eliminate nuisance tripping and so the trip current shall not be affected by ambient temperature. (ii) Circuit breakers shall be rated for tungsten loads having an inrush rating of no less than 20 times normal current. (iii) Circuit breakers shall have a 125%, 10-120 seconds, must-trip rating. (iv) Circuit breakers shall be rated for 100 percent switching duty applications. 2) A solid-state switching module (i) Each dimmer module shall use a solid-state relay (SSR) consisting of two MOSFET semi-conductors, and all required gating circuitry on the high-voltage side of
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 47 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
an integral, opto-coupled control voltage isolator. Dimmers employing triac power devices, pulse transformers, or other isolating devices not providing at least 2,500V RMS isolation shall not be acceptable. (ii) The SSR shall also contain a control LED, an output LED, an error LED, and silver-plated control and load contacts. (iii) The entire SSR shall be sealed in a plastic housing requiring only a screwdriver to replace. (iv) Dimmer modules requiring disassembly, heat sink grease, or additional tools for repair shall not be acceptable. 3) Power and control connectors (i) Modules shall not have any protruding pins subject to physical damage when the module is not installed. (ii) Power efficiency for ELV dimmers shall be at least 99 percent at full load with a no-load loss of 3V RMS. (iii) Standard fault current protection shall be 100,000A at 120V, 65,000A at 240 or 277V [Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR)] 4.3 EMERGENCY
A. Emergency Bypass Detection Kit (EBDK) 1. Emergency bypass Detection a. Where required to detect the loss of normal power and trigger special- purpose lighting presets, the detection means shall be the Emergency Bypass Detection Kit as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. b. Mechanical 1) The Kit Enclosure shall be a surface mounted, constructed of 16-gauge, formed steel panels with a removable front cover. 2) The Emergency Bypass Detection Kit shall include a 3-pole, 10 amp breaker for local over-current protection and simulation of normal power loss. (i) The enclosure shall have a lockable door to allow limited access to the over-current protection breaker 3) All components shall be properly treated and finished. (i) Exterior surfaces shall be finished in fine textured, scratch-resistant, powder coat paint 4) The EBDK enclosure shall provide discrete high and low voltage wiring compartments with voltage barrier. 5) EBDK dimensions and weights shall not exceed: (i) 10.5” H x 14” W x 4.2” D 11 lb. 6) Accessories (i) Emergency Bypass Detection Tap Kit (EBDK-TAP) (a) The Emergency Bypass Detection Kit shall support an optional tap kit for normally
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 48 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
power loss sensing within an ETC Unison DRd Enclosure (b) The Tap Kit shall provide fused over-current protection for sense feed wiring without the need for an external circuit breaker (c) The Tap Kit shall install within an ETC Unison DRd Enclosure (ii) Emergency Bypass Restore Switch (EBDK-SWITCH) (a) The Emergency Bypass Detection Kit shall support an optional switch kit ,requiring manual override before allowing the EBDK to return to a normal power state (b) The Restore Switch shall be a single-gang device, fully finished, and supplied with mounting holes. (i) The EBDK Switch Kit shall be clearly labeled identifying intended operation (ii) The Switch shall be labeled Lighting System Restore (iii) The Switch shall include a red indicator that is illuminated when bypass operation is active (c) The EBDK Switch shall require two 16-gauge wires for connection to the Emergency Bypass Detection Kit (i) Up to two Bypass Restore Switches shall be supported per Emergency bypass Detection it c. Electrical 1) Emergency Bypass Detection enclosures shall support 100 to 277 volt configurations (i) EBDK enclosures shall be field configurable for single- phase, bi-phase, and three-phase operation without the need for additional components. 2) Phase Loss Detection circuitry shall provide 0.5 second delay to prevent nuisance tripping 3) The EBDK shall provide an integrated circuit breaker for over- current protection and simulation of normal power loss 4) The Emergency bypass detection Kit shall support isolated outputs for connection to multiple dimming products simultaneously (i) Three isolated contacts shall be provided (ii) Each contact shall support connection of up to four dimming products. 5) The Emergency Bypass Detection Kit shall be completely pre- wired by the manufacturer. The contractor shall provide input feed and control wiring. 6) All control wire connections shall be terminated via factory provided connectors.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 49 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(i) Factory provided connector shall support 12 to 22-gauge wiring (ii) Emergency lighting input shall support load shedding 7) The Bypass Detection Kit shall prove a normally-closed input for interface with fire alarm systems 8) The Bypass Detection Kit shall be UL and cUL Section 924 Listed for interaction with similarly listed dimming and switching panels d. Thermal 1) Ambient room temperature: 0-40°C / 32-104°F 2) Ambient humidity: 10-90% non-condensing B. DMX Emergency Bypass Control 1. Where required to trigger special-purpose lighting presets and bypass normal lighting controls during emergency or panic situations, the bypass means shall be the DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) as manufactured by ETC, Inc., or equal 2. Functional a. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller shall be capable of overriding a single universe of ANSI E1.11–2008, USITT DMX512-A control signals from “Normal” to “Bypass” when a trigger signal is detected via a contact closure trigger input 1) The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller shall output to a single DMX output or up to six optically-isolated DMX outputs 2) The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller shall poll the bypass trigger input after a power loss and react upon start up 3) The default or recorded preset shall be recalled immediately on restart if the trigger is also applied at restart 4) Controllers that do not support E1.11–2008 compliant DMX communication shall not be acceptable b. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller shall be capable of recording a single DMX preset (snapshot) of 512 channels for recall during “Bypass” mode c. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) shall have internally accessible, labeled DIP switches for configuration of: 1) DMX Record Mode (i) All 512 channels (default) (ii) Selected channels, snapshot 2) Contact input type (i) Normally open (default) (ii) Normally closed 3) Wait Time for Restore incoming DMX (bypass trigger removed) (i) 0 Seconds (default) (ii) 10 Second Wait (iii) 30 Second Wait (iv) 10 Minute Wait 4)
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 50 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
d. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller shall support a single bypass input using two input modes: 1) Bypass triggering shall be supported via a maintained contact input configurable for normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) operation 2) The contact input shall support +12VDC wet input to provide interface with fire alarm or secondary trigging systems. Bypass controllers that do not support a fire alarm input shall not be acceptable. 3. Mechanical a. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) enclosure shall be a surface mounted enclosure with a removable cover, constructed of 16- gauge, formed steel with a removable front cover 1) All components shall be properly treated and finished in fine textured, scratch-resistant, powder coat paint 2) DEBC enclosure shall have a minimum of four keyed mounting holes for wall attachment 3) DEBC enclosure shall have a visible label stating the product name, manufacturer name, indicator functions, control functions, ratings and listings b. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) enclosure shall provide discrete high and low voltage wiring compartments with voltage barrier c. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) shall have a single bi- color LED indicator visible from the exterior of the enclosure 1) LED shall indicate Normal state with a “green” color light (i) Normal state illuminates steady green when Power and DMX are present (ii) LED Off indicates Power or DMX are not present 2) LED shall indicate Bypass state with a “red” color light (i) Bypass state includes bypass input contact trigger or ‘test’ active d. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) shall have a single test button accessible from the front of the enclosure without removing any panels 1) The test button shall immediately trigger bypass state for as long as it is held down, and release the bypass state immediately upon release of the button (i) The test button shall be momentary only (ii) The test button shall be recessed to prevent accidental triggering e. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) shall have a single, internally accessible button for DMX Record (snapshot) with an indicator LED for record action (i) The record button shall be momentary only and held for at least 3 seconds before activation to prevent accidental recording (ii) The LED indicator will flash rapidly when record function is active (iii) The LED indicator will illuminate steady when record function is complete
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 51 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
f. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) dimensions and weights shall not exceed: 1) 9” H x 11” W x 2” D, 2) 8lbs (single output); 14.5lbs (multi-output) 4. Electrical a. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller shall be completely internally pre-wired by the manufacturer b. The contractor shall provide input feed and control wiring to the provided terminals 1) DMX Emergency Bypass Controllers (DEBC) shall support 100 to 277 volt input power, 50/60 Hz, 150mA maximum current c. DEBC shall support labeled terminations for two 24 – 10 AWG solid or stranded power wires d. DEBC shall support one Grounding Lug for 24-14 AWG solid or stranded ground wire e. DEBC shall support labeled, socketed termination connections for DMX Input and DMX Output wiring 1) Terminations shall support Belden 9729 cable or equivalent (i) DMX Termination kits for Belden 9729 shall be supplied with the controller (ii) Optional Termination kits for Belden 1583A (or equivalent Category 5 cable) shall be available from the manufacturer f. DEBC shall support labeled, socketed termination for the bypass contact input 1) Termination shall support two, 30-12 AWG low-voltage wires 2) The bypass input shall support a maintained normally open (N.O.) or normally closed (N.C.) dry contact input 3) A +12VDC wet contact input shall also be available for interface to fire alarm systems. 4) DEBC shall support socketed DMX transceiver chips (i) A spare DMX transceiver chip shall be supplied in a labeled, inactive socket g. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller (DEBC) shall internally switch from the normal DMX input (pass through) to the bypass DMX output using electromechanical relays when triggered 1) The DEBC shall have non-volatile memory for storage of a single recorded sequence of 512 channels (i) The recorded sequence shall persist through power outages (ii) The default sequence shall have all 512 channels at “full” if no sequence is recorded 2) The DEBC shall have a DMX baud rate of “Slow” (20 packets per second) for increased compatibility during bypass DMX output h. The DEBC shall be available in two versions capable of output to a single DMX line or up to six optically-isolated DMX lines i. The DMX Emergency Bypass Controller shall be UL and cUL Section 924 LISTED for interaction with similarly listed products
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 52 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
5. Thermal a. Ambient room temperature: 0-40°C / 32-104°F b. Ambient humidity: 10-95% non-condensing C. BRANCH CIRCUIT EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER SWITCH (BCELTS) 1. General a. The Branch Circuit Emergency Lighting Transfer Switch (BCELTS) shall be the SC1008 as manufactured by ETC, Inc., or equal b. The BCELTS shall provide automatic transfer of a single branch circuit from normal to emergency power source, when normal power fails c. The BCELTS shall transfer a lighting load branch circuit from a dimmer/ relay or secondary control output to a second power source in the event of a loss of power to the primary power source, a normal system failure, or activation of a fire alarm d. The system shall be listed under ANSI / UL1008 Transfer Switch Equipment and comply with ANSI / NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems, and ANSI / NFPA 70 (NEC), including Article 700, 701 and 702 safety standards. Emergency transfer systems that do not comply with the below stated NEC articles and sections shall not be permitted 1) Satisfies requirements of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70): (i) Article 700 – Emergency Systems (ii) Article 701 – Legally Required Standby Systems (iii) Article 702 – Optional Standby Systems (iv) Section 518.3(C) – Assembly Occupancies (v) Section 520.7 – Theatres and Similar Locations (vi) Section 540.11(C) – Motion Picture Projection Rooms e. The BCELTS shall transfer a single circuit at 120V or 277V up to 20 Amperes in capacity 2. Transfer Switch a. The BCELTS shall be a UL1008 transfer switch listed for Emergency Systems (NEC Articles 700 and 701; UL CCN WPWR) 1) Transfer switches not listed under UL1008 shall not be acceptable 2) Transfer switches listed under UL1008 for Optional Standby (NEC Article 702; UL CCN WPXT) applications only shall not be acceptable 3) Automatic Load Control Relays (ALCR) listed under UL924 shall not be acceptable b. The switch shall be positively latched and unaffected by voltage variations or momentary outages so that constant contact pressure is maintained and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized c. The switch shall be electrically interlocked to ensure only one position, either Normal or Emergency, is engaged at any time d. The switch shall be break-before-make to ensure that normal and emergency sources are never interconnected within the unit e. Built-in fuses shall provide 10,000 Ampere Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) on the connected emergency circuit
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 53 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
f. Switch contacts shall withstand transfer without welding, with 180º phase displacement between normal and emergency power sources if both sources are energized g. Transfer switch contacts shall be rated for mixed loads, including electric discharge lamps and tungsten filament lamps h. Transfer switch shall be rated for a minimum of 6,000 cycles at full tungsten load 3. Control Circuitry a. The control circuitry shall direct the operation of the transfer switch b. A field-configurable normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) dry contact closure input shall be provided 1) Up to (10) BCELTS devices may be connected to a single remote loop c. The BCELTS shall support transfer of a 0-10V or DALI controlled circuit 1) Upon activation of emergency transfer the BCELTS shall break the 0-10V or DALI control circuit, driving connected 0-10V circuits to full output and DALI circuits to their default level. 4. Operation a. Transfer to alternate emergency supply will occur when normal supply sense voltage drops below 80V when used at 120V or 277V 5. Enclosure a. The BCELTS shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 interior type enclosure finished in fine- textured epoxy paint b. The enclosure shall be 8.5”H x 10.5”W x 2.75”D c. The system shall be provided with an approved overlay mounted on the front of the enclosure, stating, “BRANCH CIRCUIT EMERGENCY LIGHTING TRANSFER SWITCH” d. The enclosure shall be provided with an approved label indicating that the system is UL1008 LISTED for Emergency Systems 4.4 NETWORK SYSTEM
A. GENERAL NETWORK 1. General a. The Electronic Theatre Controls Net3 network shall provide data distribution over TCP/IP Ethernet networks. Data shall be layer 3 routable. Systems using proprietary formats or formats other than 10/100/100Mbit wired Ethernet or non-layer 3 routable networks shall not be accepted. b. Connections shall be made between consoles, face panels, architectural processors, dimmers, Net3 Gateways, and computers over standard Ethernet distribution systems using 100BaseT, 100BaseFL, or greater wiring. All installations shall conform to established Ethernet wiring practice, and installation shall be performed by contractors qualified to do this type of work. All wiring shall be tested at Category 5e or higher for full bandwidth operation to the appropriate IEEE standard. c. The Lighting Control system must be supplied by a single manufacturer and must have seamless integration over Ethernet between the Entertainment and Architectural lighting control. 2. Capacities
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 54 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. The network shall support DMX routing, patching, and prioritization for up to 63,399 universes (32,767,488 DMX addresses). Each address may be input or output from any port on any DMX gateway in the system. DMX input, routing and output shall be specifically supported on the system from multiple sources and locations up to the maximum number of gateways supported by the Ethernet topology. b. The network shall support multiple network hosts including consoles, gateways, dimming racks, computers, file servers, printers, and architectural control processors with discrete command lines and control. The lighting network shall support multiple venues within a system and discrete systems on the same network. 3. System Configuration and Monitoring a. Network device configuration shall be via Net3 Gateway Configuration Editor (GCE) software and/or ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN). b. Patch addresses shall support viewing and manipulation via ANSI E1.17 ACN. 1) The system shall permit complete user flexibility allowing the system operator to patch each DMX input address to any ANSI E1.31 streaming ACN address, and DMX output to span streaming ACN universes. 2) The lighting system shall support assignment of DMX offsets, truncation of DMX universes, and provide choice of DMX port prioritization. 3) The lighting system shall support the DD start code extension to ANSI E1.31 which provides priority per address such that multiple control sources can share universes with discrete control per address. 4) Lighting systems that do not support the above mentioned address patching capabilities shall not be suitable. c. The system shall allow assignable labels for all network devices to allow easy identification by system users. d. Each network device shall have a discrete and unique IP address provided automatically by the software. The user may edit this IP address. Systems that do not support automated IP allocation with IP collision avoidance, and systems that do not allow complete reconfiguration of the above mentioned features over ANSI E1.17 ACN shall not be acceptable. e. All configuration data for each network device shall be held at the device and system operation shall not require continuous on-line operation of the network configuration software. f. Lighting console operators shall be able to back up the network configurations in the lighting control console. In the event of a network device failure, the operator shall be able to apply the configuration of the failed device to a replacement device of the same type without manually reentering settings. Systems that do not support configuration backup as described above shall not be accepted. g. Architectural and Entertainment systems connected to the same network shall be capable of arbitrating control over E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN) level data. The system shall be capable of alternating control of individual address data between architectural and entertainment systems without intervention by the user. The user shall dictate the conditions under which system shall automatically take control. The network shall allow user override of the selected defaults. Systems
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 55 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
which require direct user intervention to allocate control of dimmers between architectural and entertainment lighting systems shall not be accepted. h. The Net3 network shall allow multiple DMX input sources to be prioritized on the same universe as network native sources using E1.31 Streaming ACN prioritization. Multiple DMX inputs may be assigned to the same streaming ACN address (this provides multi-source control for a particular address). Likewise, the system shall support E1.31 prioritization of multiple simultaneous network sources. Systems that cannot prioritize multiple DMX inputs and multiple native network sources on a network shall not be deemed suitable. i. The lighting network shall allow each DMX input address to be assigned a priority on the network allowing each DMX control level coming into the system to participate in full arbitration. Addresses with the highest priority shall have control, with lower priority addresses being ignored. Addresses assigned the same numeric priority, between 1 and 200, shall respond in highest level takes precedence (HTP) manor. The network shall require a valid DMX signal present at the input to initiate prioritization. Systems that do not allow for prioritized HTP for DMX inputs to the network shall not be allowed. B. DMX ETHERNET GATEWAY – ONE PORT 1. General a. The lighting control gateway shall be a microprocessor-based unit specifically designed to provide DMX-512 control of lighting systems and transport of RDM configuration and status messages. The gateway shall permit DMX-512 data to be encoded, routed over an Ethernet network and decoded back to DMX-512. The unit shall be a Response Mk2 1-port DMX Gateway as provided by ETC, Inc. b. Gateways shall communicate over Ethernet directly with at least ETC, Inc.’s entertainment and architectural lighting control products and other Ethernet interfaces. c. Connections shall be made between gateways, consoles, architectural systems, and PCs over standard Ethernet distribution systems using 10/100BaseT. d. The gateway shall support multiple protocols including: 1) ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) 2) ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN) 3) ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A 4) ANSI E1.20 Remote Device Management (RDM) e. The gateway shall be tested to UL standards and labeled ETL Listed. f. The gateway shall be RoHS Compliant (lead-free). g. The gateway shall be CE compliant. h. The gateway shall have a backlit OLED display and four buttons for identification (soft-labeling), configuration, status reporting and troubleshooting 1) Labeling shall be user configurable using ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Network (ACN), or a purpose built software configuration tool. 2) The OLED display shall show DMX port configuration indication as well as indicate the presence of valid signal.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 56 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3) Gateways that do not indicate port configuration (input/output) and valid data shall not be acceptable. i. Each gateway shall have LED indicators for Power and network activity 2. DMX Ports a. The DMX Port shall comply with the requirements of ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A standards. b. The DMX port shall be software-configurable for either input or output functionality. c. DMX input shall be optically-isolated from the gateway electronics. d. DMX port shall provide at least 500V isolation to ground and the rest of the electronics e. The DMX port shall incorporate one DMX512-A Connection 1) Gateways shall be available with the following connection options: 5-pin male XLR, 5-pin female XLR, or Ethercon RJ-45, for DMX wiring. f. Network gateways that do not indicate input/ output port configuration or indication of valid data shall not be accepted 3. Processor a. Each gateway shall have sufficient processing power to manage up to 63,999 universes (32,767,488 addresses). b. Maximum delay time from input to output shall not be greater than one packet time (approximately 22 mSec.). c. A minimum DMX update rate of 40Hz shall be sustained under all conditions unless specifically configured for a slower rate for the sake of compatibility with 3rd party DMX devices. 4. Mechanical a. The gateway shall be available in two versions 1) Wall-mount gateway (i) The gateway faceplate shall be constructed of injection molded plastic and be formed for use with any standard Decorator style faceplate (ii) A color matched faceplate shall be provided with the gateway (iii) Gateways shall be available in four standard colors (a) Cream (RAL 9001) (b) Gray (RAL 7001) (c) Black (RAL 9004) (d) Signal White (RAL 9003) (iv) The gateway shall support flush mounting using a standard RACO 1-gang, deep back box or equivalent. (a) Surface mounting shall also be supported using a manufacturer supplied back box. 2) Portable gateway (i) The portable gateway shall include a complete enclosure finished in a black or white fine texture powder coat paint (ii) Wiring connections shall be required for connection to the lighting system
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 57 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(a) Ethernet connection that supports standard Cat5 patch cables or Ethercon cables. Gateways that do not support the use of Ethercon cables shall not be accepted (b) DMX input or output connections using is 5-pin XLR or RJ45 Ethercon style connector (c) Optional low-voltage DC power input connection 5. Power a. Power for the gateway shall be provided over the Category 5 (or better) cable, utilizing IEEE 802.3af compliant Power over Ethernet (PoE). Power consumption using shall not be greater than 4 watts. b. An optional 12-24vDC power input shall be available for all wall-mount gateways c. The gateway electronics shall be electrically isolated from the power supplied over the Catagory5 (or better) cable. 6. Configuration a. The Gateway must support local or remote configuration. b. Each gateway on the network shall be individually configurable using freely available software configuration tools. The primary configuration tool shall be Net3 Concert configuration software running on a network connected PC. The PC shall only be required for configuration, and shall not be required for normal operation of the system. c. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, within the confines of 63,999 universes. d. The specific DMX data input or output by the gateway shall be freely configurable by the user. e. Multiple DMX universes may be configured with any length up to 512 total addresses. Any range of DMX input addresses shall support selection and routing to the specified sACN output. f. Multiple sACN sources may be combined with a priority may be assigned to each source sending data to the gateway. g. All relevant routing information shall be stored in non-volatile memory at each gateway. The system shall recover from a power outage without requiring the configuration PC to be online. Gateways that do not support non-volatile storage of data routing shall not be accepted. 7. Network a. Communications physical layer shall comply with IEEE 802.3i for 10BASE-T, 802.3u for 100BASE-TX and 802.3af for Power over Ethernet specifications. b. All network cabling shall be Category 5 (or better), conforming to TIA- 568A/B, and shall be installed by a qualified network installer. c. Data transport shall utilize the TCP/IP suite of protocols to transfer the DMX data. d. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) and ANSI E1.31 streaming ACN (sACN) shall be supported. Gateways that do not support ANSI E1.17 shall not be acceptable. e. Switches shall comply with power-over-Ethernet IEEE802.3af, unless a separate in-line power supply is provided.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 58 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
f. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, per DMX port within the confines of up to 63,999 universes (32,767,488 addresses) using Streaming ACN (sACN). 1) Any range of DMX addresses may be selected for each universe. 2) Multiple sources shall be supported by prioritized Highest Takes Precedence (HTP with priority). Each source shall support assignment of priority to allow override of default HTP behavior. 3) Each DMX port shall support its own universe and start address. g. Gateways shall support built in priority on a per-universe or channel-by- channel basis. Gateways that do not support prioritized merging of multiple network sources at independent channel priorities shall not be accepted. 8. Environmental a. The ambient operating temperature shall be 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F). b. The storage temperature shall be -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F). c. The operating humidity shall be 5% - 95% non-condensing. 9. Accessories a. Hanging bracket kit shall allow gateway to be mounted using C-Clamp to U-bolt Hardware. b. ETC Net3 Concert Configuration and monitoring Software 10. System Requirements a. Provide the quantity and type of gateways required, as scheduled. Gateways and software shall be as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls Inc. of Middleton, WI. C. DMX ETHERNET GATEWAY – TWO PORT 1. General a. The lighting control gateway shall be a microprocessor-based unit specifically designed to provide DMX-512 control of lighting systems and transport of RDM configuration and status messages. The gateway shall permit DMX-512 data to be encoded, routed over an Ethernet network and decoded back to DMX-512. The unit shall be a Response Mk2 2-port DMX Gateway as provided by ETC, Inc. b. Gateways shall communicate over Ethernet directly with at least ETC, Inc.’s entertainment and architectural lighting control products and other Ethernet interfaces. c. Connections shall be made between gateways, consoles, architectural systems, and PCs over standard Ethernet distribution systems using 10/100BaseT. d. The gateway shall support multiple protocols including: 1) ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) 2) ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN) 3) ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A 4) ANSI E1.20 Remote Device Management (RDM) e. The gateway shall be tested to UL standards and labeled ETL Listed. f. The gateway shall be RoHS Compliant (lead-free). g. The gateway shall be CE compliant.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 59 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
h. The gateway shall have a graphic OLED display and four buttons for identification (soft-labeling), configuration, status reporting and troubleshooting 1) Labeling shall be user configurable using ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Network (ACN), or a purpose built software configuration tool. 2) The OLED display shall show DMX port configuration indication as well as indicate the presence of valid signal. 3) Gateways that do not indicate port configuration (input/output) and valid data shall not be acceptable. i. Each gateway shall have power and network activity LEDs on the front of the gateway 2. DMX Ports a. DMX Ports shall comply with the requirements of ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A standards. b. Each DMX port shall be software-configurable for either input or output functionality. c. DMX input shall be optically-isolated from the gateway electronics. d. DMX Port shall provide at least 500V isolation to ground and the rest of the electronics e. Each port shall incorporate one DMX512-A Connection 1) Gateways shall be available with the following connection options: 5-pin male XLR, 5-pin female XLR, or Ethercon RJ-45, for DMX wiring. f. Network gateways that do not indicate input/ output port configuration or presence of valid data shall not be accepted 3. Processor a. Each gateway shall have sufficient processing power to manage up to 63,999 universes (32,767,488 addresses). b. Maximum delay time from input to output shall not be greater than one packet time (approximately 22 mSec.). c. A minimum DMX update rate of 40Hz shall be sustained under all conditions unless specifically configured for a slower rate for the sake of compatibility with 3rd party DMX devices. 4. Mechanical a. Gateway bezels shall be constructed of cast zinc finished in a fine texture powder coat. 1) Gateways shall be available in four standard colors (i) Cream (RAL 9001) (ii) Gray (RAL 7001) (iii) Black (RAL 9004) (iv) Signal White (RAL 9003) 2) The bezel shall have no visible means of attachment b. Gateways shall support surface, flush and portable mounting options 1) Flush-mount to industry standard 2-gang back box 2) Surface back box dimensions shall be 7.3” wide x 4.8” high x 3.5” deep and available from the manufacturer 3) Portable gateway
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 60 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(i) The portable gateway shall include a complete enclosure finished in a black or white fine texture powder coat paint (ii) Wiring connections shall be required for connection to the lighting system (a) Ethernet connection that supports standard Cat5 patch cables or Ethercon cables. Gateways that do not support the use of Ethercon cables shall not be accepted (b) DMX input or output connections using is 5-pin XLR or RJ45 Ethercon style connector (c) Optional low-voltage DC power input connection 5. Power a. Power for the gateway shall be provided over the Category 5 (or better) cable, utilizing IEEE 802.3af compliant Power over Ethernet (PoE). Power consumption using shall not be greater than 4 watts. b. An optional low-voltage DC power input shall also be available utilizing an isolated in-line power supply capable of an operating range of 12- 24vDC. The Power supply shall be optionally provided by the gateway manufacturer. c. The gateway electronics shall be electrically isolated from the power supplied over the Catagory5 (or better) cable. 6. Configuration a. The Gateway must support local or remote configuration. b. Each gateway on the network shall be individually configurable using freely available software configuration tools. The primary configuration tool shall be Net3 Concert configuration software running on a network connected PC. The PC shall only be required for configuration, and shall not be required for normal operation of the system. c. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, within the confines of 63,999 universes. d. The specific DMX data input or output by the gateway shall be freely configurable by the user. e. Duplicate outputs of DMX lines (DMX splitter) and discrete outputs shall be fully supported. f. Multiple DMX universes may be configured with any length up to 512 total addresses. Any range of DMX input addresses shall support selection and routing to the specified sACN output. g. Multiple sACN sources may be combined with a priority may be assigned to each source sending data to the gateway h. All relevant routing information shall be stored in non-volatile memory at each gateway. The system shall recover from a power outage without requiring the PC to be online. Gateways that do not support non- volatile storage of data routing shall not be accepted. 7. Network a. Communications physical layer shall comply with IEEE 802.3i for 10BASE-T, 802.3u for 100BASE-TX and 802.3af for Power over Ethernet specifications.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 61 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. All network cabling shall be Category 5 (or better), conforming to TIA- 568A/B, and shall be installed by a qualified network installer. c. Data transport shall utilize the TCP/IP suite of protocols to transfer the DMX data. d. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) and ANSI E1.31 streaming ACN (sACN) shall be supported. Gateways that do not support ANSI E1.17 shall not be acceptable. e. Switches shall comply with power-over-Ethernet IEEE802.3af, unless a separate in-line power supply is provided. f. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, per DMX port within the confines of up to 63,999 universes (32,767,488 addresses) using Streaming ACN (sACN). 1) Any range of DMX addresses may be selected for each universe. 2) Multiple sources shall be supported by prioritized Highest Takes Precedence (HTP with priority). Each source shall support assignment of priority to allow override of default HTP behavior. 3) Each DMX port shall support its own universe and start address. g. Gateways shall have built in DMX merger capability on a universe or channel-by-channel basis. h. Gateways shall support have built in priority on a per-universe or channel- by-channel basis. Gateways that do not support prioritized merging of multiple network sources at independent priorities shall not be accepted. 8. Environmental a. The ambient operating temperature shall be 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F). b. The storage temperature shall be -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F). c. The operating humidity shall be 5% - 95% non-condensing. 9. Accessories a. Hanging bracket kit shall allow gateway to be mounted using C-Clamp to U-bolt Hardware. b. A Universal Power Supply with international plug-set shall be available. Multiple power supplies shall be able to fit in a vertically stacked power strip. c. ETC Net3 Concert Configuration and monitoring Software 10. System Requirements a. Provide the quantity and type of gateways required, as scheduled. Gateways and software shall be as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls Inc. of Middleton, WI. D. DMX ETHERNET GATEWAY – FOUR PORT 1. General a. The lighting control gateway shall be a microprocessor-based unit specifically designed to provide DMX-512 control of lighting systems and transport of RDM configuration and status messages. The gateway shall permit DMX-512 data to be encoded, routed over an Ethernet network and decoded back to DMX-512. The unit shall be a Response Mk2 4-port DMX Gateway as provided by ETC, Inc.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 62 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. Gateways shall communicate over Ethernet directly with at least ETC, Inc.’s entertainment and architectural lighting control products and other Ethernet interfaces. c. Connections shall be made between gateways, consoles, architectural systems, and PCs over standard Ethernet distribution systems using 10/100BaseT. d. The gateway shall support multiple protocols including: 1) ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) 2) ANSI E1.31 Streaming ACN (sACN) 3) ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A 4) ANSI E1.20 Remote Device Management (RDM) e. The gateway shall be tested to UL standards and labeled ETL Listed. f. The gateway shall be RoHS Compliant (lead-free). g. The gateway shall be CE compliant. h. The gateway shall have a graphic OLED display and four buttons for identification (soft-labeling), configuration, status reporting and troubleshooting 1) Labeling shall be user configurable using ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Network (ACN), or a purpose built software configuration tool. 2) The OLED display shall show DMX port configuration indication as well as indicate the presence of valid signal. 3) Gateways that do not indicate port configuration (input/output) and valid data shall not be acceptable. i. Each gateway shall have power and data activity LEDs on the front of the gateway 2. DMX Ports a. DMX Ports shall comply with the requirements of ANSI E1.11 USITT DMX512-A standards. b. Each DMX port shall be software or locally-configurable for either input or output functionality. c. DMX input shall be optically-isolated from the gateway electronics. d. DMX Port shall provide at least 500V isolation to ground and the rest of the electronics e. Each port shall incorporate one DMX512-A Connection 1) Gateways shall be available with the following connection options: 5-pin male XLR, 5-pin female XLR, Ethercon RJ- 45, or terminal strip for DMX wiring. f. Network gateways that do not indicate input/ output port configuration or presence of valid data shall not be accepted 3. Processor a. Each gateway shall have sufficient processing power to manage up to 63,999 universes (32,767,488 addresses). b. Maximum delay time from input to output shall not be greater than one packet time (approximately 22 mSec.). c. A minimum DMX update rate of 40Hz shall be sustained under all conditions unless specifically configured for a slower rate for the sake of compatibility with 3rd party DMX devices. 4. Mechanical
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 63 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. The gateway shall be available in two versions 1) Rack-Mount/Portable (i) The Gateway shall be fabricated of 16-gauge steel, finished in fine-texture, scratch-resistant, black powder coat (RAL 9004). (ii) The gateway shall support table top use (iii) The gateway shall support field configuration allowing the Ethernet port to be either on the front or the rear of the unit 2) DIN Rail Mount (i) The DIN Rail mounted gateway shall be included in an extruded plastic enclosure. (ii) Two wiring connections shall be required for connection to the lighting system (a) Ethernet connection that supports standard Cat5 patch cables (b) DMX input or output connection using is terminal strip or IDC-style connector b. Optional accessories for rack-mount and pipe applications shall be available from the manufacturer. These accessories shall support installation by an end-user 5. Power a. Power for the gateway shall be provided over the Category 5 (or better) cable, utilizing IEEE 802.3af compliant Power over Ethernet (PoE). Power consumption using shall not be greater than 7 watts. b. An optional low-voltage DC power input shall be available utilizing an isolated in-line power supply capable of an operating range of 12- 24VDC. The Power supply shall be provided by the gateway manufacturer. c. The gateway electronics shall be electrically isolated from the power supplied over the Category 5 (or better) cable. 6. Configuration a. The Gateway must support local or remote configuration. b. Each gateway on the network shall be individually configurable using freely available software configuration tools. The primary configuration tool shall be Net3 Concert configuration software running on a network connected PC. The PC shall only be required for configuration, and shall not be required for normal operation of the system. c. Each port of the DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, within the confines of 63,999 universes. d. The specific DMX data input or output by the gateway shall be freely configurable by the user. e. Duplicate outputs of DMX lines (DMX splitter) and discrete outputs shall be fully supported. f. Multiple DMX universes may be configured with any length up to 512 total addresses. Any range of DMX input addresses shall support selection and routing to the specified sACN output. g. Multiple sACN sources may be combined with a priority may be assigned to each source sending data to the gateway
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 64 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
h. All relevant routing information shall be stored in non-volatile memory at each gateway. The system shall recover from a power outage without requiring the PC to be online. Gateways that do not support non- volatile storage of data routing shall not be accepted. 7. Network a. Communications physical layer shall comply with IEEE 802.3i for 10BASE-T, 802.3u for 100BASE-TX and 802.3af for Power over Ethernet specifications. b. All network cabling shall be Category 5 (or better), conforming to TIA- 568A/B, and shall be installed by a qualified network installer. c. Data transport shall utilize the TCP/IP suite of protocols to transfer the DMX data. d. ANSI E1.17 Architecture for Control Networks (ACN) and streaming ACN (sACN) shall be supported. Gateways that do not support ANSI E1.17 shall not be acceptable. e. Each DMX gateway shall control up to 512 DMX addresses, per DMX port within the confines of up to 63,999 universes (32,767,488 addresses) using Streaming ACN (sACN). 1) Any range of DMX addresses may be selected for each universe. 2) Multiple sources shall be supported by prioritized Highest Takes Precedence (HTP with priority). Each source shall support assignment of priority to allow override of default HTP behavior. 3) Each DMX port shall support its own universe and start address. f. Gateways shall have built in DMX merger capability on a universe or channel-by-channel basis. g. Gateways shall support have built in priority on a per-universe or channel- by-channel basis. Gateways that do not support prioritized merging of multiple network sources at independent priorities shall not be accepted. 8. Environmental a. The ambient operating temperature shall be 0° to 40°C (32° to 104°F). b. The storage temperature shall be -40° to 70°C (-40° to 158°F). c. The operating humidity shall be 5% - 95% non-condensing. 9. Accessories a. Hanging bracket kit shall allow unit to be mounted in three orientations. 1) U-Bolt or C-Clamp mounting hardware shall be available b. One E.I.A. rack space mounting bracket kit shall support either one or two complete units and allow for up to eight ports of DMX c. Front Access Panel kit shall allow the connectors on the rear of the gateway to be accessed from the front of an equipment rack. Options for 5-pin XLR style connectors that support DMX input or output shall be available d. A Universal Power Supply with international plug-set shall be available. Multiple power supplies shall be able to fit in a vertically stacked power strip. e. ETC Net3 Concert Configuration and monitoring Software 10. System Requirements
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 65 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. Provide the quantity and type of gateways required, as scheduled. Gateways and software shall be as manufactured by ETC Inc. of Middleton, WI. 4.5 CONTROL STATIONS
A. TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL STATIONS 1. The Touchscreen Control Stations shall be the Unison Paradigm Touchscreen P- TS7 Series Control Stations as manufactured by ETC, Inc., or equal. 2. General a. Touchscreen stations shall support default and fully graphical control pages. b. The Touchscreen station shall operate using graphic buttons, faders and other images on at least 30 separate programmable control pages. c. Touchscreen stations shall also allow programming of page pass-code, lock out and visibility levels. 3. Mechanical a. Touchscreen stations shall consist of a seven inch, backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) with a minimum resolution of 800 by 400 pixels and 24- bit color depth with a capacitive touch interface. b. Touchscreen bezels shall be constructed of cast aluminum finished in a fine texture powder coat. 1) Touchscreen shall be available in five standard colors (i) Cream (RAL 9001) (ii) Ivory (RAL 1015) (iii) Gray (RAL 7001) (iv) Black (RAL 9004) (v) Signal White (RAL 9003) 2) The bezel shall have no visible means of attachment. 3) The bezel shall allow the touchscreen to be installed and removed without the use of tools. 4) The bezel shall provide two working positions for the Touchscreen: service and normal operation. c. Touchscreen shall offer optional hinged locking covers 1) Locking covers shall be made from cast aluminum and be painted to match standard touchscreen color options 2) Locking covers shall allow for viewing of system status on the touchscreen though a smoked Lexan window d. The manufacturer shall provide back boxes for all LCD stations. 1) Flush back box for Touchscreens with or without locking covers shall be 7.94” wide x 5.33” high x 3.25” deep 2) Surface back box dimensions shall be 8.3” wide x 5.6” high x 2.75” deep 3) Surface back box for Touchscreens with locking cover dimensions shall be 10.0” wide x 6.7” high x 2.75” deep 4. Electrical a. Touchscreens shall be powered entirely by the System network.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 66 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. Touchscreens shall connect to the System using an Ethernet network with Power over Ethernet (PoE) or the Unison control station Echelon® Link power network. 1) Ethernet Network (i) Ethernet network shall be 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af (PoE) compliant. (ii) Network shall utilize Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5, or better wiring. (iii) PoE power consumption shall be PoE class 2, consuming no more than 6 watts. 2) Echelon® Link power network. (i) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). (ii) Touchscreen stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free. (iii) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. (iv) Network insulation displacement connectors shall be provided with all stations. 5. Functional a. System 1) The Touchscreen shall support configuration firmware upload from a Paradigm Processor as proxy 2) The Touchscreen shall support configuration or firmware upload from local removable media b. Setup Mode 1) There shall be a setup display that is separate from any user- defined configuration 2) It shall be possible to view and modify connectivity settings 3) It shall be possible to view status information 4) It shall be possible to view and modify LCD screen settings 5) It shall be possible to perform Touchscreen calibration 6) It shall be possible to view and modify audio settings 7) The appearance of the setup display shall be standard and not editable 8) The setup display may be invoked from within the user- defined configuration and/or physical button on the Touchscreen 9) There shall be a default protected method to invoke the setup display c. Configurations 1) It shall be possible to have multiple configurations stored within an LCD Station 2) Where multiple configurations are stored there shall be a boot menu to allow selection of a configuration d. Operation
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 67 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Touchscreen controls. System shall allow the control of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events. (i) System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader, Touchscreen, or LightDesigner software. (a) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 84,600 seconds with a resolution of one hundred milliseconds. (b) Presets shall be selectable via Touchscreen stations. (ii) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software. (a) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps and allow the application of conditional logic. (b) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or LightDesigner software. (iii) System time clock events shall be programmable via the Touchscreen, LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server. (a) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types. (b) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time. (iv) A Color picker, supporting Hue, Saturation and Brightness (HSB) color selection shall be available for color selection of color changing fixtures and provide visual feedback of the current color produced by the associated fixture. (a) The color picker shall be provided with a default layout that requires no user configuration (b) The Color Picker shall provide RGB faders in addition to the default HSB color wheel for color selection (c) Color picker values shall allow for numerical value input in addition to color wheel and fader control (d) The color picker shall be compatible with color mixing systems that use up to seven discrete color control channels
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 68 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) Touchscreen stations shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program. (i) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, and cue light, or room join/separate. (ii) Optional fader functions include master control, individual channel control, fade rate control or preset master control. 3) Touchscreen stations shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner. 4) It shall be possible to adjust LCD contrast and brightness. 5) It shall be possible to program the station to dim during periods of inactivity. B. PORTABLE TOUCHSCREEN CONTROL STATIONS 1. The Portable Touchscreen Control Stations shall be the Unison Paradigm Portable Touchscreen P-TS7-P/PE Series Control Stations as manufactured by ETC Inc., or equal. 2. General a. Portable Touchscreen stations shall support default and fully graphical control pages. b. Portable Touchscreen stations shall operate using graphic buttons, faders and other images on at least 30 separate programmable control pages. c. Portable Touchscreen stations shall also allow programming of page pass- code, lock out and visibility levels. d. Portable Touchscreen station shall support connection to the System using an Ethernet network with Power over Ethernet (PoE) or the Unison control station Echelon® Link power network. e. Portable Touchscreen stations connected to the Unison control station Echelon® Link shall support location awareness to automatically load the configuration required dependent on the connection point to the system 3. Mechanical a. Portable Touchscreen stations shall consist of a seven inch, backlit liquid crystal display (LCD) with a minimum resolution of 800 by 400 pixels and 24-bit color depth with a capacitive touch interface. b. The Portable Touchscreen enclosure and cover shall be constructed of aluminum and finished in a black fine-texture powder coat paint c. The enclosure shall provide a hinged cover with two positions for the Touchscreen: closed and normal operation. d. The Portable Touchscreen shall have a protective cover for removable media ports. e. The Echelon® Link Touchscreen shall include an attached cable with 6-pin Amphenol connector and strain relief to interface with Portable Connector Stations 1) Attached Cable shall be 15’ in length constructed of ultra- flexible material
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 69 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) Extension cables up to 100’ in length shall be available to extend the cable length to a maximum of 115’ total length f. The Ethernet Network Touchscreen shall include a Neutrik Ethercon Port on the rear of the touchscreen for connection to an Ethernet Network. 1) Unit will ship with a 10’ Ethercon to RJ-45 cable 2) Cables with extended lengths shall be available up to 300’ in length. 4. Electrical a. Portable Touchscreens shall be powered entirely by the System network. b. Portable Touchscreens shall connect to the System using an Ethernet network with Power over Ethernet (PoE) or the Unison control station Echelon® Link power network. 1) Ethernet Network (i) Ethernet network shall be 10/100BaseTX, auto MDI/MDIX, 802.3af (PoE) compliant. (ii) Network shall utilize Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Category 5, or better wiring. (iii) PoE power consumption shall be PoE Class 2, consuming no more than 6 watts. 2) Echelon® Link power network. (i) Link power shall utilize low-voltage Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). (ii) Touchscreen stations shall also require (2) #16 AWG stranded wires for 24Vdc operating power. 24Vdc wiring shall be topology free. (iii) Network wiring may be bus, loop, home run, star or any combination of these. 5. Functional a. System 1) The Portable Touchscreen shall support configuration upload from a Paradigm Processor as proxy 2) The Touchscreen shall support configuration or firmware upload from local removable media 3) It shall be possible to connect multiple Portable Touchscreen station to the system at one time b. Setup Mode 1) There shall be a setup display that is separate from any user- defined configuration 2) It shall be possible to view and modify connectivity settings 3) It shall be possible to view status information 4) It shall be possible to view and modify LCD screen settings 5) It shall be possible to perform Touchscreen calibration 6) It shall be possible to view and modify audio settings 7) The appearance of the setup display shall be standard and not editable
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 70 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
8) The setup display may be invoked from within the user- defined configuration and/or physical button on the Portable Touchscreen 9) There shall be a default protected method to invoke the setup display c. Configurations 1) It shall be possible to have multiple configurations stored within an LCD Station 2) It shall be possible for Portable Touchscreen Stations connected via the Echelon® Link power network to select a configuration automatically based on the physical connection point of the touchscreen. 3) Where multiple configurations are stored there shall be a setup menu to allow selection of a configuration. d. Operation 1) The Unison Paradigm Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Touchscreen controls. System shall allow the control of presets, sequences, macros and time clock events. (i) System presets shall be programmable via Button, Button/Fader or Touchscreen stations, or LightDesigner software. (a) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 84,600 seconds with a resolution of one hundred milliseconds. (b) Presets shall be selectable via Touchscreen stations. (ii) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner system software. (a) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps and allow the application of conditional logic. (b) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or LightDesigner software. (iii) System time clock events shall be programmable via the Touchscreen, LightDesigner system software, the processor user interface, or the internal web server. (a) Time clock events shall be assigned to system day types. Standard day types include: anyway, weekday, weekend, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. System shall support programming of additional custom or special day types. (b) Time clock events shall be activated based on sunrise, sunset, time of day or periodic event. System shall automatically compensate for regions using a fully configurable daylight saving time. (iv) A Color picker, supporting Hue, Saturation and Brightness (HSB) color selection shall be available
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 71 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
for color selection of color changing fixtures and provide visual feedback of the current color produced by the associated fixture. (a) The color picker shall be provided with a default layout that requires no user configuration (b) The Color Picker shall provide RGB faders in addition to the default HSB color wheel for color selection (c) Color picker values shall allow for numerical value input in addition to color wheel and fader control (d) The color picker shall be compatible with color mixing systems that use up to seven discrete color control channels 2) Portable Touchscreen stations shall be designed to operate standard default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the Windows-based configuration program. (i) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, and cue light, or room join/separate. (ii) Optional fader functions include master control, individual channel control, fade rate control or preset master control. 3) Portable Touchscreen stations shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner. 4) It shall be possible to adjust LCD contrast and brightness. 5) It shall be possible to program the station to dim during periods of inactivity. C. DIGITAL BUTTON AND FADER STATIONS 1. Button and Fader Stations a. General 1) The control station shall be the Paradigm Inspire Station Series as manufactured by ETC, Inc., or equal 2) It shall be a remote station on a LinkConnect network that can recall presets, provide direct zone control, play macros and provide room combine actions for a control system 3) The station shall consist of a dual function (control/ record) push-button with an integral tri-color backlight for each corresponding button and fader b. Mechanical 1) Control stations shall operate using one, two, four, six or eight buttons. A four button with fader station shall also be available 2) All button stations shall be available with cream, grey, black or white decorator style faceplates (i) Manufacturer's standard colors shall conform to the RAL CLASSIC Standard
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 72 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3) Stations shall have tri-color backlights for each button and fader (i) Indicators shall utilize a configurable color backlight for active status (ii) Indicators shall utilize a configurable color backlight for inactive status to assist in locating stations in dark environments. Stations that do not support a lit inactive or deactivated state shall not be accepted (iii) Stations shall support an off backlight state of inactive status when required 4) All faceplates shall be designed for flush or surface mounting and have no visible means of attachment 5) Station faceplates shall be constructed of ABS plastic and designed based on a standard decorator style faceplate. 6) Buttons shall be indelibly laser marked for each button function 7) Control station electronics shall mount directly behind the faceplate. The entire assembly shall mount into a single gang back box. Back boxes for flush mounted stations shall be industry standard back boxes. The manufacturer shall supply back boxes for surface mounted stations. c. Electrical 1) Control station wiring shall be LinkConnect control wiring utilizing low-voltage, Class II unshielded twisted pair, type Belden 8471 or equivalent, and one #14 ESD drain wire (when not installed in grounded metal conduit). 2) The station shall operate on class 2 voltage provided by the control system via the LinkConnect network. 3) Station wiring must be topology free. It may be point-to-point, bus, loop, home run or any combination of these. 4) Wiring termination connectors shall be provided with all stations. 5) Control stations shall be UL/ cUL listed and CE marked and meet WEEE Compliance d. Functional 1) The Control System shall be designed to allow control of lighting and associated systems via Button and Fader controls. (i) System presets shall be programmable via LightDesigner configuration software. (a) Presets shall have a discrete fade time, programmable from zero to 1,000 hours with a resolution of one millisecond. (ii) System macros and sequences shall be programmable via LightDesigner configuration software. (a) Macro and sequence steps shall provide user selectable steps, and allow the application of conditional logic. (b) Macro and sequences shall be activated by button, time clock event or LightDesigner software.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 73 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) Control components shall be designed to operate default or custom system functions. Components shall operate default functions unless re-assigned via LightDesigner, the software-based configuration program. (i) Optional button functions include: preset selection, manual mode activation, record mode activation, station lockout, raise, lower, macro activation, or room join/separate. (ii) Optional fader functions include manual master control, individual zone control, color control fade rate control or preset master control. 3) Stations (Button and Button/Fader) shall allow programming of station and component electronic lockout levels via LightDesigner.
4.6 DATA PLUG-IN STATIONS
A. General 1. The Plug-in Stations shall consist of the appropriate connectors required for the functional intent of the system. These stations shall be available with DMX input or output, Remote Focus Unit, Network, or architectural control connectors. Custom control connectors shall be available. B. Connector Options 1. The following standard components shall be available for Plug-in Stations: a. 5-Pin male XLR connectors for DMX input b. 5-Pin female XLR connectors for DMX output c. 6-Pin female XLR connectors for RFU and ETCLink connections d. RJ45 connectors for Network connections - Twisted Pair e. 6-Pin female DIN connectors for Unison connections f. DB9 female serial connector for architectural control from a computer 2. Custom combinations and custom control connections shall be available. C. Physical 1. Station faceplates shall be .80” aluminum, finished in fine texture, scratch-resistant black powder coat. Silk-screened graphics shall be white. 2. The station panel shall mount into an industry standard back box, depending on size and quantity of connectors. A terminal block shall be supplied for contractor terminations. 4.7 POWER DISTRIBUTION
A. POWER DISTRIBUTION – CONNECTOR STRIPS 1. General a. Connectors shall be available as 20A, 50A and 100A grounded stage pin, 20A twist lock and 20A “U” ground (dual rated “T-slot”); other connectors shall be available as specified b. Internal wiring shall be sized to circuit ampacity and shall be rated at 125°C c. Pigtails shall be three-wire type “S” jacketed cable sized for the maximum circuit ampacity
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 74 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
d. Pigtails with 20 amp stage pin connectors shall be terminated using 12 gauge 4 way indent crimp (with inspection window) type where the wire is inserted and crimped directly in the socket e. Terminations shall be at one end using feed-through terminals individually labeled with corresponding circuit numbers 1) 20 amp circuits shall use screwless tension clamp terminals listed for 20 – 8 gauge wire 2) 50 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 10 – 1 gauge wire 3) 100 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 8 – 2/0 gauge wire 4) Terminals that place a screw directly on the wire are not acceptable f. Connector strips shall be supplied with appropriate brackets and hardware for mounting as shown on the drawings 1) Connector strips shall have junction brackets on 5’ centers 2) Brackets shall be 1½” x .188” ASTM A36 steel 3) Hardware shall be ASTM A307 grade 5 g. A low voltage distribution system shall be available to incorporate DMX, Ethernet or other protocols as specified in the connector strip. Connector strips shall utilize a voltage barrier to accommodate these systems. Low Voltage signals shall enter the connector strip via a strain relief or connector mounted in a separate low voltage terminal box at the specified end of the connector strip. Up to four low voltage cables shall be supported for each connector strip 1) Connector strips with multiple DMX outputs from the same source shall use DMX pass through assemblies consisting of a 6” panel with the one DMX output connector, one DMX input (Pass Through) connector, one DMX pass through (Bypass) switch, and a label detailing the use of the pass through assembly 2) The bypass switch shall be used when no DMX devices are present at that location. When activated, the DMX pass through switch shall pass DMX directly through to the next DMX panel on the strip. The pass through switch shall have a mechanical indicator to show the operator that it has or has not been engaged h. Connector Strips shall be listed by a nationally recognized test lab (NRTL) 2. Physical a. Connector strips shall be 6.25” H x 3.3” D and fabricated from 18-gauge galvanized steel and finished in black fine-texture powder coat paint 1) Covers shall be fabricated from 16-gauge galvanized steel b. Connector strips shall be available in any length specified in increments of 6” and shipped fully wired with all splicing hardware c. Pigtails and outlets shall be spaced on 18” centers or as otherwise specified d. Outlets shall be mounted on individual 3” panels e. No external terminal boxes shall be required for connector strips with 28 or fewer circuits unless otherwise specified f. Circuits shall be labeled on the connector strip with 2” lettering 1) Circuit labeling options shall include:
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 75 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(i) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector strip with white lettering on black background labels (ii) Circuits shall be labeled on front and back sides of the connector strip with white lettering on black background labels (iii) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector strip with engraved lamacoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels (iv) Circuits shall be labeled on the front and rear sides of the connector strip with engraved lamacoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels (v) Circuits shall be labeled on one side of the connector strip using individual circuit cover plates with lettering engraved in the cover and filled with the specified color (vi) Circuits shall be labeled using specified labeling per plans and drawings g. Connector strips shall support optional LED indicators to indicate the presence of power at each local circuit. The indicator shall be red in color and mounted in the connector strip 1) The LED indicator shall be mounted in the lower right corner of the outlet panel 2) The LED indicator shall be mounted in the connector strip trough directly below the outlet panel 3) The LED indicator shall be mounted in the center of the 3” plate directly below the circuit label for pigtail circuits 3. Junction Boxes a. Gridiron junction boxes shall be available to accommodate “S” type cable wiring into connector strips mounted to non-fixed locations b. Junction Boxes shall be fabricated from 16-gauge cold rolled steel with 14 gauge end panels. They shall be finished with fine-textured, scratch- resistant, black powder coat paint. Cover(s) shall be 16-gauge cold rolled steel and hinged to allow mounting in any direction B. OUTLET AND PIGTAIL BOXES 1. General a. Connectors shall be available as 20A, 50A and 100A grounded stage pin, 20A twist lock and 20A “U” ground (dual rated “T-slot”); other connectors shall be available as specified b. Pigtails shall be three-wire type “S” jacketed cable sized for the maximum circuit ampacity c. Pigtails with 20 amp stage pin connectors shall be terminated using 12 gauge 4 way indent crimp (with inspection window) type where the wire is inserted and crimped directly in the socket d. Terminations for pigtail connectors shall utilize feed- through terminals individually labeled with corresponding circuit numbers 1) 20 amp circuits shall use screwless tension clamp terminals listed for 20 – 8 gauge wire 2) 50 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 10 – 1 gauge wire
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 76 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3) 100 amp circuits shall use compression terminals listed for 8 – 2/0 gauge wire 4) Terminals that place a screw directly on the wire are not acceptable e. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be supplied with appropriate brackets and hardware for mounting as shown on the drawings 1) Standard mounting options shall include pipe or wall mounting 2) Brackets shall be made from ASTM A36 steel 3) Hardware shall be ASTM A307 grade 5 f. A low voltage distribution system shall be available to incorporate DMX, Ethernet or other protocols as specified in the power distribution box 1) A voltage barrier shall be used to separate the low voltage wiring for the electrical circuits g. Power distribution equipment shall be listed by a nationally recognized test lab (NRTL) 2. Physical a. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be 6.25” H x 3.3” D and fabricated from 18 gauge galvanized steel and finished in black fine-texture powder coat paint 1) Covers shall be fabricated from 16-gauge galvanized steel b. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall be available in any length specified in increments of 3-inches with a maximum length of up to 3-feet c. Pigtails and outlets shall be spaced on 18” centers or as otherwise specified d. Outlets shall be mounted on individual 3” panels e. Circuits shall be labeled with 1.25” lettering 1) Circuit labeling options shall include: (i) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector strip with white lettering on black background labels (ii) Circuits shall be labeled on front and back sides of the connector strip with white lettering on black background labels (iii) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector strip with engraved lamacoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels (iv) Circuits shall be labeled on the front and rear sides of the connector strip with engraved lamacoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels (v) Circuits shall be labeled on one side of the connector strip using individual circuit cover plates with lettering engraved in the cover and filled with the specified color (vi) Circuits shall be labeled using specified labeling per plans and drawings f. Outlet and pigtail boxes shall support optional LED indicators to indicate the presence of power at each local circuit. The indicator shall be red in color and mounted in outlet or pigtail box 1) The LED indicator shall be mounted in the lower right corner of the outlet panel
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 77 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) The LED indicator shall be mounted in the bottom of the outlet or pigtail box directly below the outlet panel 3) The LED indicator shall be mounted in the cover plate directly below the circuit label for pigtail circuits C. FLOOR POCKET 1. General a. The floor pocket shall be a wiring device designed for flush mount installation into the floor. b. Connectors shall be available as 20A grounded stage pin, 20A twist lock and 20A “U” ground (dual rated “T-slot”); other connectors shall be available as specified. c. Terminations shall be made at each connector by the installer contractor. 1) 20 amp circuits shall use tension clamp terminals listed for 20 – 8 gauge wire. 2) Terminals that place a screw directly on the wire shall not be acceptable. d. Floor pockets shall be supplied with back box and cover plate e. The floor pocket back box shall have provisions for an integral voltage barrier for low voltage circuits. f. Floor pockets shall be listed by a nationally recognized test lab (nrtl). 2. Physical a. Floor pocket back boxes shall be 9”H x 13”W x 9”D and fabricated from 16-gauge cold rolled steel, finished in black fine-texture powder coat paint. b. Floor pocket covers shall be constructed of 3/8” cast iron with a non-skid tread pattern utilizing a low-gloss black finish. 1) The cover shall be constructed with integral hinges and four (4) cable notches. 2) Covers are attached to the floor using four (4) mounting holes at the corners with hardware provided by the installing contractor c. Floor pocket connectors shall be mounted in a connector panel fabricated of 16-gauge steel finished in a low gloss black powder coat paint 1) The connector plate shall be attached to the floor pocket cover. d. Circuits shall be labeled on the connector strip with 9/16” lettering. 1) Circuit labeling options shall include: (i) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector panel with white lettering on black background labels. (ii) Circuits shall be labeled on the front side of the connector panel with engraved lamicoid labels utilizing white lettering on black background labels. (iii) Circuits shall be labeled using specified labeling per plans and drawings 4.8 COMPANY SWITCH
A. General
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 78 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. The Company Switch shall be available in 2 models: PowerSafe Pro, and PowerSafe Compact; as designed by Electronic Theatre Controls. 2. Compact Models shall be available at 120/208V: 100A, or 200A; 3-phase, 4-wire plus ground. 3. Pro Models shall be available at 120/208V: 100A, 200A or 400A; 3-phase, 5-wire (double neutral) plus ground. 4. The Company Switch shall be UL and cUL listed and shall meet all applicable NEC standards. 5. The enclosure shall be NEMA 1 rated. B. Mechanical 1. The Company Switch shall be fabricated of 16 gauge steel and finished using ETC styling with fine-textured scratch resistant epoxy paint. 2. The door which provides access to output connections shall be lockable with shunt trip interlock. 3. The “Compact” Enclosure size shall not exceed 25” high by 15.5” wide and 6” deep. The “Pro” Enclosure size shall not exceed 43.8” high by 18” wide and 6” deep. 4. Company Switch shall protect against access to power connections while the cabinet is energized so it can be guaranteed that output is in a “power off” state while connecting or disconnecting portable output cabling. 5. The company switch shall protect the user from unsecured access to output terminals and connectors in the following methods: a. PowerSafe Compact: Door brackets shall lock swing hinged covers in place until the front door is opened. These brackets shall prevent insertion of connections under power. b. PowerSafe Pro: Front access connector compartment shall protect against access to output connections behind a locked door while the cabinet is energized 6. The “Pro” Enclosure size shall not exceed 43.8” high by 18” wide and 6” deep. 7. Conduit entry shall be made via top, or side. Top and side panel shall free of conduit knockouts to allow for greater flexibility in contractor conduit entry. 8. A method of field isolating company switch chassis ground and connected equipment ground (“ISO ground”) shall be supported without installation of additional kits or parts. Company Switch products that require additional parts to be shipped or factory configuration of “ISO ground” shall not be deemed acceptable. 9. Company switch shall accept 3rd party locks on built- in bracket for support of NFPA 70E safety lockout/tagout procedures. 10. The unit shall be capable of mounting on a wall with integral keyhole fixing points. 11. LED power indicators shall be provided to show that power is on/available between each phase and neutral. 12. PowerSafe “Pro” shall provide an LED Work Light which shall automatically illuminate the output connectors and lugs during “hook up” of portable equipment cabling. 13. Lugs shall support up to 4/0 class K cable for bare end tie-in through 500kcmil screw terminals. C. Electrical 1. PowerSafe Pro shall include six CAM style connectors for each phase, dual neutral, and ground. Standard order connector genders shall be females for
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 79 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
each phase, with male ground and neutral connectors. Other connector gender combinations shall be available on request. 2. PowerSafe Compact shall include five CAM style connectors for each phase, neutral, and ground. Standard order connector genders shall be females for each phase, with male ground and neutral connectors. Other connector gender combinations shall be available on request. 3. PowerSafe Pro shall include dual neutral output connections for support of 200% rated neutral. 4. The enclosure shall accept up to 200A or 400A copper or aluminum to the full name plate rating of the enclosure at 100% of the rated main breaker with a minimum AIC rating of 65,000A. 5. System rating of Company Switch shall be 65,000 amps symmetrical Short Circuit Current Ratting (SCCR). Company Switch products that rely only on breaker AIC rating as a short circuit safety factor shall be deemed unacceptable. Company Switch products that have not proven this safety rating through high current short circuit testing with UL shall not be deemed safe for use under UL SCCR requirements and therefore are not acceptable. D. Available Accessories 1. An option shall be provided and approved by UL for connection of field installed current transformers around incoming power conductors for connection to external 3rd party power meters. 2. An option shall be available in the PowerSafe Pro for strain relief. 4.9 LIGHTING SYSTEM AND ACCESSORIES
A. General 1. The lighting control desk shall be a microprocessor-based system specifically designed to provide complete control of stage, studio, and entertainment lighting systems. The device shall be the Gio as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc., or equal. 2. The system shall provide control either 4,096 or 24,576 outputs on a maximum of 32,768 control channels, patched across any number up to 99,999. Systems that require external co-processing to control 24,576 outputs shall not be acceptable. Output shall be distributed over a 10/100 MB Ethernet network using Net3/ACN, ETCNet 2, Avab and/or ArtNet (multi-cast) protocols. The user shall be able to control the application of protocols at an individual address level. 3. The system shall support full bi-directional RDM communication with compatible devices via Net3 DMX/RDM Gateways. RDM communication shall adhere to ANSII standard E1.20-2006 Entertainment Technology – RDM – Remote Device Management over DMX512 Networks. Supported RDM features shall include: a. Discovery and Identification of RDM capable devices b. Setting of start addresses, operating modes and additional settings as exposed by connected devices and controllable via RDM c. Viewing of Sensor data as provided by connected devices d. Error reporting as provided by connected devices 4. A maximum of 10,000 cues, 999 cue lists, 1000 groups, 1000 presets, 4 x 1000 palettes (Intensity, Focus, Color and Beam), 99,999 macros, 1000 effects, 1000 curves, 1000 color paths and 1000 snapshots may be contained in non-volatile electronic memory and stored to an onboard solid-state hard drive or to any USB storage device.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 80 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
5. Recorded cue lists may be played back simultaneously on a maximum of 200 faders. Channels shall, by default, respond to cue information by last instruction, with discrete rate control provided for all cues. The console may be placed in Tracking or Cue Only mode by the user as a system default and overridden on individual record actions as required. HTP/LTP intensity flags, assert, proportional, intensity master or manual master fade control and priority status may be placed on each cue list. It shall also be possible for a cue list to contribute to playback background states or to withhold such contributions. 6. A Master Playback fader pair shall be provided. The 100 mm motorized fader pair may execute move fades, state fades or all fades, with IFCB cue level timing, 7. Ten 100mm motorized faders shall be user configurable across 100 pages and provide additional playback faders (up to 200), additive, inhibitive or effect submasters (up to 999), and one grand master. Presets and IFCB palettes may be loaded to faders for playback control, either individually or in user-defined lists. Virtual fader control is also provided. 8. The system shall have two 12.1 inch integral articulating multi-touch displays. Content posted to these displays shall be user definable. Displays shall support multiple interpreted simultaneous touches. 9. A high-resolution level wheel shall be provided to control intensity for selected channels and scrolling/zooming of selected displays. Four page-able high- resolution encoders shall be provided for control of non-intensity parameters. Non-intensity encoders may be operated in coarse or fine mode, with the amount of movement per revolution of the encoders in coarse mode definable by the user. Tactile feedback for full frame (color or image) operations shall be provided. The expand function for frame table devices shall provide a graphic representation of all images and colors in the associated device for instant selection. The display shall also provide an indication of the current value for the associated parameter, based on channel selection. A high-resolution rate wheel, which may also be used for fader paging, is provided. 10. Control surface buttons shall be backlit. The backlighting shall provide indication of functional states. Backlight intensity shall be user configurable and shall automatically dim after a defined period of inactivity. 11. Control and programming features for automated fixtures shall also include: a standard library of fixture profiles, the ability to copy and edit existing profiles and create new profiles, patch displays including channel and output addressing, 16-bit fade resolution, color characterization allowing color mixing and matching to color media data. 12. System information, including playback status, live output and blind values for all record targets shall be displayed on a maximum of three external high resolution Display Port monitors, which may also be multi/touch-screens. All displays may also be routed to the two integral touch screens. 13. A context sensitive on-line Help feature shall explain and provide an example of the operation of each feature of the system. The help system shall be integrated into the on-board user manual via hyperlinks. 14. A fully integrated Virtual Media Server feature shall allow the user to map images and animations to a rig array. 40 such maps may be created, each with 12 layers. Systems that rely on external hardware or software for this functionality shall not be acceptable. 15. User-definable, interactive displays may be created. These displays, which can be used in live and blind operating modes, allow graphical layout of channels, desk buttons and programming tools. Standard symbols are provided, and the user may import their own symbols or graphics. Each symbol may be individually defined with data feedback characteristics. Non-interactive status information, such as a mirror of other user’s command lines, may also be included in the display. A graphical browser is provided for fast selection of
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 81 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
these views. Multiple zoom factors and placements may be stored and recalled for each display 16. A full-function external backlit alphanumeric keyboard shall be provided. The keyboard shall allow labeling of all show content. The central touch screen shall also repaint to access a virtual alphanumeric keyboard. 17. Software upgrades shall be made by the user via USB flash drive. It shall be possible to install software updates in all desks, processor units and remotes from one device over the network. 18. The operating software shall be loaded into program execution memory from the internal solid-state hard drive when the console is powered. In the event of an uncontrolled shutdown, the device shall return to its last output state when power is restored. Devices requiring a UPS to provide such protections shall not be acceptable. 19. Dimmer monitoring and configuration features shall be provided (in conjunction with ETC’s Sensor+, Sensor 3 or FDX dimming systems) to allow indication of dimming system status, dimmer load monitoring and show specific configurations. Communications with the dimming system shall utilize ANSI E1.17 2006 - Entertainment Technology - Architecture for Control Networks. 20. Show data may be created and modified on a personal computer, using either Windows 7 or higher operating systems, with a free offline editing application. The offline editor may also run natively on Intel-based Macintosh platforms using OS 10.11 (El Capitan) or later. The program shall also allow output to visualization software supporting the same protocols as the lighting system. 21. PC using Windows 7 or higher or an Intel-based Macintosh computer using OS 10.11 or later running a client software application shall be able to connect to a control system via the network and view or modify current show data in an independent display environment, using an ETCnomad key. When connected without the key, the computer shall operate in Mirror Mode, with the device to be mirrored selectable by the user. Systems that do not provide client software that may run natively on the Apple platform in this environment shall not be acceptable. 22. Synchronized backup shall be provided via another full desk on the network, a remote processor unit or a PC/Mac using ETCnomad. The backup unit shall maintain synchronized playback with the master and shall take over control of the lighting system upon loss of communication with the master, either automatically or upon user confirmation. Use of two RPUs to service and backup system output is also supported. 23. A maximum of 99 users may access and interact with show data simultaneously. Each user shall have an individual workspace. User identification may be assigned to more than one control device, allowing users to work in tandem, or allowing a designer/ALD to mirror the current display format, mode and command line of the associated programmer. Partitioned control allows discrete control of channel/parameter groupings by user. Partitioned control may be easily enabled and disabled with no need to merge show data from multiple users. 24. Show files are saved across the system to all available integral hard drives simultaneously. 25. The system shall support up to 32 individual simultaneous Time Code inputs or Event lists using Show Control Gateways. 26. Systems that do not provide the above capabilities shall not be acceptable. B. Controls and Playback 1. Manual Control and Programming Section
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 82 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. The programming keyboard shall be grouped by function. Major groupings shall be record target functions, numeric keys, level assignment functions, display navigation functions and controls, as well as non- intensity parameter controls. b. The command keypad shall be fully interactive with direct select controls, Magic Sheets and in-cell editing. c. Non-intensity parameters may be set numerically via an extensible keypad on the central LCD. This control shall be fully interactive with the page-able encoders. The LCD touch screen associated with the encoders shall display the current encoder function. The touch screen shall also access available modes for each parameter type, min and max values for each parameter as applicable, as well as home position on a parameter basis. Each encoder shall support shift functions for fine control. The range of motion of coarse control may be set by the user. Tactile encoder feedback shall indicate full and half frame positioning of certain controls. d. Only those parameters available for control in the active lighting system shall be displayed for control. Displays shall lowlight parameters not available to selected channels. Alternatively, the encoders may be placed in a state allowing parameters not applicable to the current selection to be suppressed. e. Lamp controls provide direct access to luminaire functions such as striking and dousing arc lamps and calibrating entire fixtures or individual mechanisms of fixtures, as provided by the luminaire manufacturer. User access to these features is normalized across all manufacturers for ease of use. Use of a “control channel” for accessing these functions shall not be required and systems requiring use of control channels for these functions shall not be acceptable. f. Fan functions shall be provided both via command line operation and through encoder controls. g. Highlight shall be supported, with user definable highlight values. Lowlight conditions may be defined for selected, but not specified channels. Rem Dim commands, at specific levels by channel, may be optionally and automatically called with the highlight command. h. Fixtures with color mixing may be set with direct additive or subtractive encoder controls or the command line, as well as via the color pickers. Six optional color spaces are supported, as well as tinting tools, and spectrum tools for systems with more than three color mixing elements. Color may also be set directly to a gel match via a graphic selection tool or from the command line. The gel picker shall support tools for identifying similar colors, show favorites and graphic indications of gel locations. Color Path tools, allow the user to control the live fade of fixtures through the color space, with intensity dampening. i. The Virtual Media Server function shall allow the user to create layouts of devices, identified as pixel maps. Media content (images, movies, text and procedurally generated effects) may then be applied, manipulated and stored. Stock content is provided and the user may import custom imagery and animations. j. Macros may be set to run as default. Default macros called manually shall post to the command line, but executed via cue lists shall run in the background. The user may override this behavior by defining the macro to always execute in the foreground or background, regardless of the recall method. Startup, Shutdown and Disconnect macros may also be defined. 2. Playback Section
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 83 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. The playback faders shall consist of a motorized 100mm Master Fader pair with associated Load, Go and Stop/Back buttons and a 10 x 100 page fader array. b. Up to 200 playback faders may be defined on the 10 fader x 100 page fader array. Each playback shall have an associated 100mm motorized potentiometer and three control buttons. c. Faders may be grouped for playback with slides and button action defined by the user. d. It shall be possible to instantaneously halt an active cue, back to the previous cue, manually override the intensity fade or manually override the entire fade. e. It shall be possible for a cue list to contribute to the background state or for the contents of each cue list to be withheld from such. Priority and background priority states may be established. f. Playback faders shall have the following associated controls: 1) Freeze, which halts the output of the fader 2) Stop Effect, which stops the action of an effect 3) Filter, to assign filter states to a fader 4) Go To Cue 0, to reset a cue list 5) Off, to turn off the contents of a playback, releasing control to the background state or to set to null. 6) Assert, to replay an active cue 7) Release, to release control to the background and reset the cue list. 8) Timing Disable, channel filters and independent status may also be defined. 9) The potentiometer shall be configurable as a proportional master, an intensity master, or manual master. Support for rate, effect rate, effect size and Master Only controls is also provided. Filtered manual timing masters and effects masters may be configured. 10) Rate override and fader paging are supported with a wheel encoder and associated controls. 3. Submasters a. Up to 999 proportional, fully overlapping additive, effect or inhibitive submasters may be defined. Submasters shall have colored LEDs to indicate submaster status. Each submaster may have fade up, dwell and down fade times. Each has a bump and assert/channel select button. b. Submasters may be set to HTP or LTP intensity. Non-intensity parameters on submasters shall be LPT only. c. Exclusive mode for a submaster shall prohibit the live contribution of that submaster from storing to cues or other submasters. Shield mode prohibits access of associated channels from any other playback or manual control operations. d. A submaster potentiometer may be defined as proportional or intensity master. When set as intensity master, a mark and unmark feature is supplied. Priority states may be assigned. e. Motorized faders shall set submasters to required positions as fader pages are changed. f. The submaster blind buffer shall be linked directly to live playback.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 84 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
g. It shall be possible to set submaster values directly from the command line. h. LTP submasters may be set to fade to background or to minimum value when the fader is returned toward zero. i. Submaster values may contribute to the background state or withheld from such. 4. Grand Master Fader a. The location of the Grand Master shall be user definable. The grand master shall have associated blackout and blackout enable buttons. b. Blackout shall send all associated intensity outputs to zero. Non-intensity outputs shall not be affected. c. Motorized faders shall set grand masters to required positions as fader pages are changed. C. Display Controls 1. Format shall change the view of selected displays. 2. It shall be possible for the user to choose which parameter categories or parameters (s)he wishes to display. 3. Flexichannel modes shall change which channels are viewed in selected displays, as follows: a. No modes b. Masters only/ cells only c. Use Partitions 4. Flexichannel states shall change which channels are viewed in selected displays, as follows: a. All channels b. Patched channels c. Show channels d. Active/Moved channels e. Selected channels f. Manual Channels g. View channels (user identified list) h. Channels with discrete timing 5. Expand shall extend the selected view sequentially across connected displays. 6. [Time] depressed shall display discrete timing data. [Data] suppressed shall display absolute values of referenced data. These controls may be latched. 7. Displays may also be toggled to show stored data currently manually overridden, the source of the current parameter data, output level, patch assignment, part structure and referenced marking data. 8. User definable magic sheets shall provide alternative display of and access to channels and record targets. Multiple magic sheets may be created, each with a variety of zoom and placement factors for rapid recall of the required view. 9. Playback status displays are provided with a variety of different formats. Indications are provided per cue for live moves (lights fading from zero and also moving non-intensity parameters) and dark moves (inactive lights which have stored non-intensity parameter moves). The user may select a static or dynamic time display in the cue list itself. 10. Display content including which of the workspaces is in focus on any of the five monitors and what views are docked in those workspaces may be instantly recalled using snapshots.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 85 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
D. Operating Modes 1. Live Mode a. Channel lists may be constructed using the +, -, and Thru keys as well as the direct selects. Channel selection is fully interactive, regardless of the method used. b. Levels may also be set with the keypad, level wheel and non-intensity encoders. “Selected” channels shall be those last addressed and under keypad control. Controls are provided for single button access to the last selected channel list, all channels with manual levels and all active channels. c. Channels may be set at a user defined default level using the Level key. +% and -% keys adjust channels quickly by user definable values. d. Channels and/or channel parameters may be captured. Capture mode shall allow the user to selectively capture channel data at specific levels. Captured data shall be indicated on the Live display. e. Sneak shall be used to restore specified channels to background states, default values, or to send them to specified values, in user specified times. f. Selected channels may be set at a level or held to current values while all other channels are set to zero using Rem Dim. Toggling Rem Dim shall restore all unselected channels to original levels. The Rem Dim level shall be user definable via the command line or with a default setup value. g. Channels may be recorded into groups for fast recall of commonly used channels. 1000 groups shall be available. Groups shall store selection order and subgrouping functions. The Offset function supports rapid creation of ordered groups, including reverse and random order. h. Parameter settings may be stored to Intensity, Focus, Color and Beam Palettes and to Presets. All referenced data may be stored to whole numbers or to up to 99 decimal places between each whole number. i. The following conditions may be placed on a channel or channel parameter to be included with a cue record action. 1) Discrete fade time and/or delay 2) Block flag 3) Assert flag 4) IFCB Filters, which may be set at a parameter level. 5) Release and Restore j. 999 cue lists may be stored. Cues may be recorded in any order. Up to 99 decimal cues may be inserted between any two whole number cues. Each cue may contain a maximum of twenty parts. k. It shall be possible to record cues and cue parts with the following information: 1) Any collection of channel data, as determined by the use of “Record”, “Record Only” or selective store commands, combined with parameter filters. 2) Cue Level timing and delays for Intensity Up, Intensity Down, Focus, Color and Beam. 3) Follow or hang time 4) Link instruction 5) Loop value
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 86 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
6) Block, Assert, Preheat, and/or Mark Flag 7) Curve 8) Allfade 9) Label and note 10) Execute list to trigger other activity (execute cue lists, cues, macros and snapshots). Cue list partitions shall be available to curate list content. l. Non-intensity channel parameters may be marked (preset), in two ways. Automark presets any parameters transitions in the cue just prior to intensity becoming active. Automark may be disabled on a cue or cue part basis, enabling a “live” move. Alternatively, non-intensity parameters may be marked to a specific cue with a single command instruction. It shall not be necessary to store these parameters directly into the cue in which the movement is to occur. m. Any channel parameter may be stored with an effect instruction. These effects may contain relative offsets from current value, or absolute instructions. Effects may be progressive action or on/off states. Entry and exit behaviors shall modify the channel parameters activity when beginning and ending the effect. n. Update may be used to selectively add modified parameter data quickly to that parameter’s current source. Trace may be used to modify the data to the original source of its move instruction. It shall be possible to update inactive record targets. A context sensitive display provides detailed information regarding the results of the update command. o. Recall From quickly pulls specified data from record targets or other channels into the current view. Recall on an HTP basis shall be provided. p. Copy To quickly copies selected data to specified channels or other record targets. q. Address and channel check functions shall be provided. r. Channel parameters may be “parked” at levels. Those levels are not added to any live record operations, nor may they be changed until the parked element is “unparked”. Scaled park provides real time proportional adjustment of stored intensity values. Address Park shall also be provided. s. About shall provide detailed status of selected channels or specified record targets. This shall include current source, current value, discrete timing, parked value, marked to and for indications. Background levels and current DMX output are also displayed. Channel usage indicates submaster and cue information and also provides a "dark moves" report on a per channel basis. t. 1000 snapshots may be stored which instantly recall specified front panel and display configurations. u. Live data may be displayed in a summary view, a detailed table orientation or a user-defined magic sheet. v. Query shall allow selection of channels by their current or possible state. Keywords and fixture types shall allow quick access to fixtures. w. User definable home positions may be defined on a per- channel/per- parameter basis. x. Undo shall be used to sequentially step back through manual operations or to undo record and delete actions. It shall be possible to undo multiple commands in one action.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 87 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2. Blind Mode a. The Blind display allows viewing and modification of all record targets without affecting stage levels. b. Record target data may be displayed in a summary view, a detailed table orientation or a spreadsheet view, which allows quick data comparisons, move and replace functions. c. Changes to blind data shall be automatically stored. Range selection of both record targets and channels shall be supported. 3. Patch Display a. Patch shall be used to display and modify the system control channels with their associated library data. b. Each channel may be provided with a proportional patch level, curve, label, White Point, swap and invert functions, Live/Dark flag enable/disable, as well as keywords to service Query. c. A full library of profiles is provided, with the ability for the user to define “favorites” for fast selection. d. Offset functions in patch shall allow selection of channel ranges and shall allow the user to establish a “custom” footprint for any device output. e. Custom color wheels, color scrolls and gobo wheels shall be defined in patch. These devices shall be created with a simple table and graphical user interface supported by images of major manufacturers. f. RDM discovery and device monitoring shall be supported. g. Copy to, Swap and Move functions shall be supported in patch. 4. Setup/Browser a. Setup shall access system, user and device configurations. b. It shall be possible to partially import show files. Users shall be able to select as much or as little of the show file as required, with renumber tools. c. It shall be possible to import ASCII and Lightwright data files. It shall be possible to export as ASCII or .csv. d. Setup shall also access show data storage, import, export, print to .pdf and clear functions, as well as show data utilities. e. The system shall support programming and playback of real time clock events, including cue, submaster and macro execution at specific times of specified days or at a time based on astronomical events. f. A control screen shall be provided for network configuration, selecting date/time, software update controls, selecting functional language and/or keyboard for labeling option, as well as other system level tools. g. Available languages for prompts, advisories and help messages shall include English, Bulgarian, German, Spanish, French, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Russian, Chinese, simplified and Chinese, traditional. h. Supported keyboards shall include American, United Kingdom, French, German, Italian, Korean, Norwegian, Russian, Slovakian, Turkish, Swiss, Swedish, Finnish and Bulgarian E. Dimmer Monitoring and Configuration 1. The lighting control system shall provide communication with an ETC Sensor+, Sensor3 or FDX dimming system for remote monitoring and configuration of show specific functions from within the software application. 2. Circuit level configuration and monitoring functions shall include but not be limited to:
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 88 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. Control mode (dimmable, switched, latch-lock, always on, off or fluorescent). b. Curves c. Control threshold d. Min and Max Scale Voltage e. Preheat f. Scale load 3. Rack status messages shall include but not be limited to: a. State of UL924 panic closure b. DMX port error/failure c. Network error/failure d. A, B, C Phase below 90 or above 139 volts and headroom warning e. Ambient temperatures out of range 4. Circuit status shall include but not be limited to: a. Module type and location b. Output level c. Control Source d. Overtemp 5. Advanced circuit feedback shall include but not be limited to: a. Load higher or lower than recorded value b. DC detected on output c. SCR failed on/off d. Breaker trip e. Module has been removed f. Load failure g. Shutdown due to Overtemp F. Interface Options 1. The desk shall support a variety of local interfaces. a. AC input b. USB (a minimum of seven ports shall be provided for connecting devices such as an Alpha-numeric keyboard, mouse, touch screens, USB Flash drive, etc.) c. Ethernet (two ports): 802.3af compliant PSE. Each port shall be individually configurable. d. Three Display Port output connectors, supporting monitors at 1280x1024 resolution minimum. Touch or multi-touch support of any/all of these monitors is provided. e. Four DMX512A/RDM Ports f. Contact Closure Trigger Via D-Sub Connector g. OSC and UDP Transmit/Receive G. Accessories 1. ETCpad (ETC Portable Access Device) 2. iRFR and iRFR Preview (applications for iPhone, iPod Touch and iPad units) 3. aRFR (application for Android devices)
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 89 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
4. Net3 Remote Video Interface 3 5. 20 Fader or 40 Fader non-motorized fader wings 6. 10 Fader or 20 Fader non-motorized fader wings 7. Net 3Gateways a. Net3/ETCNet 2 to DMX/RDM Gateways (one to four ports) b. Show Control Gateway c. I/O Gateway with 12 analog inputs, 12 SPDT contact outputs, RD232 interface 8. ETCnomad (offline, client and/or backup operation) H. Synchronized Backup 1. An optional Backup system shall consist of one of the following combinations of devices: a. Two networked desks. b. One (or more) desk with one Remote Processor Unit (RPU) c. One (or more) desk with two Remote Processor Units (RPUs) d. One (or more) desk with ETCnomad I. Physical and Acoustical 1. All operator controls and electronics for a standard system shall be housed in a single desktop unit, not to exceed 44.7” wide, 25” deep, 12” high, weighing 83 pounds. 2. Power shall be 90 – 240V AC at 50 or 60Hz, supplied via a detachable power cord. 3. At typical CPU utilization, the unit shall operate at ≤ 32 dBA.
4.10 LIGHTING FIXTURES
A. Color mixing or White-light Light Emitting Diode Profile fixture 1. General a. The fixture shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of intensity and color. The fixture shall be a Source Four LED Series 2 as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal. b. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility c. The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use d. The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX-512A standard 2. Physical a. The unit shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs and pits, finished in black. b. The following shall be provided: 1) Lens secured with silicone shock mounts 2) Shutter assembly shall allow for +/-25 rotation 3) 20 gauge stainless steel shutters 4) Interchangeable lens tubes for different field angles with Teflon guides for smooth tube movement
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 90 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
5) Sturdy integral die cast gel frame holders with two accessory slots, and a top-mounted, quick release gel frame retainer 6) Rugged steel yoke with two mounting positions allowing 300+ rotation of the fixture within the yoke 7) Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch 8) Slot with sliding cover for motorized pattern devices or optional iris c. The housing shall have a rugged black powder coat finish 1) White or silver/gray powder coat finishes shall be available as color options 2) Other powder coat color options shall be available on request d. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be integral to each unit. e. The unit shall ship with: 1) Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard 2) 5’ Neutrik PowerCon™ to Edison power cable as standard 3) Gate diffuser 4) A-size pattern holder f. Available options shall include but not be limited to: 1) Bare-end, Stage-Pin or Twist-lock type-equipped power leads 2) PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking 3) Smooth Wash Diffuser for overlapping beams of light from multiple fixtures 3. Optical a. The light beam should have a 2-to-1 center-to-edge drop-off ratio b. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to: 1) Low gate and beam temperature 2) Sharp imaging through a three-plane shutter design c. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to: 1) 5, 10, 14, 19, 26, 36, 50, 70 and 90 degree field angles 2) High-quality pattern imaging 3) Sharp shutter cuts without halation 4) Shutter warping and burnout in normal use shall be unacceptable 5) Adjustable hard and soft beam edges d. 19, 26, 36, and 50 degree units shall have optional lens tubes available for precision, high-contrast imaging. 4. Environmental and Agency Compliance a. The fixture shall be ETL and cETL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the job site. b. The fixture shall be ETL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use c. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location use. 5. Thermal a. Fixture shall be equipped with a cooling fan. 1) Fan speed control via a DMX channel shall be possible
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 91 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) Fan speed software shall permit the fixture to override DMX fan speed setting to prevent heat damage to the fixture b. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems to maintain LED life to an average of 70% intensity after 54,000 hours of use (Lustr) and 20,000 hours (Tungsten HD and Daylight HD) 1) Thermal management shall include multiple temperature sensors within the housing to include: (i) LED array circuit board temperatures (ii) Temperature sensors placed on each individual LED color circuit (iii) Fixture ambient (iv) CPU 2) Fixture user shall permit monitoring of temperature sensors via a legible LCD multi-line backlit display 3) Fixtures that do not provide active thermal monitoring of LED circuits and other temperature readings shall not be acceptable c. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F) minimum, to 40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature. 6. Electrical a. The fixture shall be equipped with a 100V to 240V 50/60Hz internal power supply b. The fixture shall support power in and thru operation 1) Power in shall be via Neutrik® PowerCon™ input connector 2) Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® PowerCon ™ output connector 3) Fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker c. The fixture requires power from a non-dim source d. Power supply outputs shall have self-resetting current-limiting protection e. Power supply shall have power factor correction 7. LED Emitters a. The fixture shall contain a minimum of four different LED colors to provide color characteristics as described in the Color Section below. b. All LEDs used in the fixture shall be high brightness and proven quality from established and reputable LED manufacturers. 1) Fixture shall utilize Luxeon® Rebel™ and/or Osram OSLON Square LED emitters c. Manufacturer of LED emitters shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process to maintain color consistency. d. All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum three-hour burn-in test during manufacturing. e. LED system shall comply with all relevant patents f. Fixtures shall have adjustable PWM frequency up to 25,000hz to avoid flicker on camera 8. Longevity a. The Lustr fixture shall be provided with an LM-84 test report from a nationally recognized test lab
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 92 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) LM-84 results shall be no less than 54,000 hours L70 rating b. All fixtures shall be provided with the minimum warranty: 1) 5 years full fixture coverage 2) 10 years LED coverage 9. Calibration a. Fixture shall be calibrated at factory for achieve consistent color and intensity output between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins 1) Calibration data shall be stored on the LED array as a permanent part of on-board operating system 2) All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to insure consistency 3) Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable 10. Color a. The fixture shall utilize a minimum of 60 LED emitters b. The fixture shall be available in specialized LED arrays as outlined below: 1) Source Four LED Series 2 Lustr (i) Red, Amber, Green, Cyan, Blue, Indigo and Lime LEDs in an array designed for broad spectrum color, light tints, and variable whites. This array shall be the Lustr array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measured brightness of the Lustr array shall be greater than 6,500 field lumens 2) Source Four LED Series 2 Tungsten HD (i) Mint, red, orange, blue, and indigo in an array designed to provide a variable white-light adjustable from 2700K to 6500K. (Designed for highest CRI and output between 2700K and 4500K) This array shall be the Tungsten HD array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measured brightness of the Tungsten HD array shall be greater than 10,000 field lumens 3) Source Four LED Series 2 Daylight HD (i) Mint, red, blue, and indigo in an array designed to provide a variable white-light adjustable from 2700K to 6500K. (Designed for highest CRI and output between 4000K and 6500K)This array shall be the Daylight HD array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measured brightness of the Daylight HD array shall be greater than 10,000 field lumens 11. Dimming a. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high- resolution dimming. b. At least four different dimming curve options shall be accessible at the fixture’s User Interface 1) Incandescent 2) Standard
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 93 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3) Linear 4) Quick c. Dimming curves shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades. d. The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM) e. LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways: 1) PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related equipment 2) PWM rates shall be adjustable by the user at the fixture if necessary to avoid any visible interference to video cameras and related equipment 12. Control and User interface a. The fixture shall be USITT DMX 512A-compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors b. The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard 1) All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably equipped control console 2) Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM 3) Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access or temperature monitoring via RDM shall not be compatible c. The fixture shall be equipped with multi-line LCD display for easy-to-read status reports and configuration changes d. The fixture shall be equipped with a six-button user-interface e. The fixture shall offer multiple DMX input profile options to include: 1) RGB - control of all individual LED colors via a three-channel profile (i) Red, Green, Blue 2) HSI – control of all individual LED colors via a three-channel profile (i) Hue, Saturation, Intensity 3) HSIC – control of all LED colors via a four-channel profile (i) Hue, Saturation, Intensity and Color Point (a) Color point provides variable color temperature settings 4) Direct – control of each individual color channel via an independent channel 5) Studio – Control of the fixture in a white-light 3 channel profile (i) Intensity, Color Temperature, +/- Green (Tint) (a) Without DMX the fixture can master other Source Four LEDs and Desire fixtures that are connected via 5 pin XLR DMX cables 6) A variable-rate strobe channel shall be provided f. The fixture shall offer three output settings
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 94 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) Boost mode - powers LEDs at maximum intensity and provides no compensation against LED ‘droop’ or intensity loss 2) Regulated mode – slightly restricts maximum LED intensity levels to compensate against LED droop 3) Protected mode – further restricts maximum LED intensity levels to compensate against LED droop and offer color consistency at highest permissible ambient temperatures (40C) 4) Fixtures that do not provide regulated and protected operation modes are not acceptable g. The fixture shall offer additional user-definable options to including but not limited to: 1) Display time out options 2) Loss of data behavior options 3) White point settings 4) Red-shift option for tungsten dimming emulation h. The fixture shall offer five Quick Set-Ups to allow user to rapidly select different combinations of the numerous user options based on the desired usage situation, to include: 1) General – for most situations 2) Stage – when emulating incandescent fixtures is desired 3) High Impact – when maximum output and effect is desired 4) XT Arch – when color consistency and architectural characteristics are desired. 5) Studio - when DMX or stand-alone of white light output is required with intensity, color temperature and color tint control parameters i. The fixture shall offer stand-alone functionality eliminating the need for a console 1) Fixture shall ship with 24 preset colors accessible as a stand- alone feature 2) Fixture shall ship with 12 sequences accessible as a stand- alone feature 3) Each color and sequence can be modified by the end user 4) Fixtures can be linked together with standard DMX cables and controlled from designated master fixture (i) Up to 32 fixtures may be linked 5) Fixtures in a stand-alone state shall restore to the settings present prior to power cycling, eliminating the need for reprogramming 6) Fixtures without stand-alone operation features described above shall not be acceptable. j. The fixture shall be capable of copying all performance settings to other fixtures of the same type via a 5 pin XLR DMX cable
B. Color mixing Light Emitting Diode Wash fixture 1. General
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 95 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a. The fixture shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of intensity and color. The fixture shall be a Desire D40 or D40 Studio as manufactured by Electronics Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal. b. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility c. The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use d. The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX-512 A standard. e. The fixture shall be provided with the minimum warranty of 5 years full fixture coverage and 10 years LED array coverage f. All LED emitters must have a L70 rating of no less than 50,000 hours 1) Substitutes must provide evidence of minimum L70 rating of no less than 50,000 hours via a LM-80 report on all emitters (i) LM-80 report must be provided with a LM-79 report and an in situ temperature measurement test verifying the conditions of the fixture meet the conditions of the LM-80 report (ii) All tests and reports must be completed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (iii) All tests must be conducted to IES standards 2. Physical a. The fixture shall be contained in a rugged all-metal die-cast housing, free of burrs and pits. b. The housing shall have a rugged black powdercoat finish 1) White or silver/gray powdercoat finishes shall be available as color options 2) Other powdercoat color options shall be available on request c. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be integral to each unit. d. Fixture housing shall provide two easy-access slots for secondary lenses and other accessories 1) Slots shall be equipped with locking retaining clip e. The unit shall ship with: 1) Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard 2) 5’ power lead with Edison connector as standard f. Available options shall include but not be limited to: 1) Yoke with floor stand conversion feature 2) Bare-end, Stage-Pin or Twist-lock type-equipped power leads 3) PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking 4) Multiple secondary lens options to include multiple angles in the following patterns: (i) Linear (ii) Round (iii) Oblong g. Light output shall be via a round aperture 1) Aperture and accessory slots shall accommodate standard 7.5” accessories such as used in other similar-sized fixtures
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 96 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) Accessories available as options shall include but not be limited to: (i) Gel/diffusion frames (ii) Top hats (iii) Barndoors (iv) Egg crate louvers (v) Concentric ring louvers (vi) Multiple secondary lensing options 3. ENVIRONMENTAL AND AGENCY COMPLIANCE a. The fixture shall be UL and cUL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the job site. b. The fixture shall be UL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use c. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location use. 4. THERMAL a. Fixture shall be totally convection cooled, requiring no cooling fan. Fixtures which require an on-board cooling fan shall not be acceptable unless pre-approved b. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems to maintain LED life to an average of 70% intensity after 50,000 hours of use 1) Thermal management shall include multiple temperature sensors within the housing to include: (i) LED array circuit board temperatures (ii) Temperature sensors placed on each individual LED color circuit (iii) Fixture ambient (iv) CPU 2) Fixture user shall permit monitoring of temperature sensors via a legible LCD multi-line backlit display 3) Fixtures that do not provide active thermal monitoring of LED circuits and other temperature readings shall not be acceptable c. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of -20°C (-4°F) minimum, to 40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature. 5. ELECTRICAL a. The fixture shall be equipped with 100V to 240V 50/60 Hz internal power supply b. The fixture shall support power in and thru operation 1) Power in shall be via Neutrik® PowerCon™ input connector 2) Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® PowerCon ™ output connector 3) Fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker c. The fixture requires power from non-dim source d. Power supply outputs shall have self-resetting current limiting protection e. Power supply shall have power factor correction
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 97 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
6. LED Emitters a. The fixture shall contain a minimum of 5 different LED colors to provide color characteristics as described in Section G below. b. All LEDs used in the fixture shall be high brightness and proven quality from established and reputable LED manufacturers. 1) Fixture shall utilize Luxeon® Rebel™ LED emitters c. Manufacturer of LED emitters shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process to maintain color consistency. d. LED emitters should be rated for nominal 50,000 hour LED life to 70% intensity e. All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum eight-hour burn-in test during manufacturing. f. LED system shall comply with all relevant patents 7. CALIBRATION a. Fixture shall be calibrated at factory for achieve consistent color and intensity output between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins 1) Calibration data shall be stored on the LED array as a permanent part of on-board operating system 2) All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to insure consistency 3) Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable 8. COLOR a. The fixture shall utilize an minimum of 40 LED emitters b. The fixture shall be available in specialized LED arrays as outlined below: 1) Desire D40 (i) Red, Amber, Green, Cyan, Blue, Indigo and White LEDs in an array designed for broad spectrum color, light tints, and variable whites. This array shall be the Lustr+ array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measured brightness of the Lustr+ array shall be greater than 2900 field lumens (ii) Red, Orange, Amber, Green, Cyan, Blue and Indigo LEDs in an array designed for broad spectrum deep colors. This array shall be the Vivid array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measured brightness of the Vivid array shall be greater than 2500 field lumens (iii) Red, Orange, Amber, Green and Indigo LEDs in an array designed for extra-high brightness output in red/warm end of the spectrum. This shall be the Fire array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measured brightness of the Fire array shall be greater than 2500 field lumens (iv) Red, Orange, Green, Cyan, Blue and Indigo LEDs in an array designed for extra-high brightness output in the blue/cool end of the spectrum. This shall be the Ice
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 98 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measured brightness of the Ice array shall be greater than 1800 field lumens 2) Desire D40 Studio (i) Warm White, Cool White, Red, Green, Blue and Indigo LEDs in an array designed for high-brightness variable color temperature white light output. This shall be the Studio HD array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measure brightness of the Studio HD array shall be greater than 3100 field lumens (ii) All Warm White LEDs in an array designed for non- variable single color high-output, warm white light. This shall be the Studio Tungsten array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measure brightness of the Studio tungsten array shall be greater than (TBD) field lumens (iii) All Cool White LEDs in an array designed for non- variable single color high-output, cool white light. This shall be the Studio Daylight array as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, or approved equal (a) Measure brightness of the Studio Daylight array shall be greater than (TBD) field lumens (iv) 9. DIMMING a. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high- resolution dimming. b. At least four different dimming curve options shall be accessible at the fixture’s User Interface 1) Incandescent 2) Standard 3) Linear 4) Quick c. Dimming curves shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades. d. The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM) e. LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways: 1) PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related equipment 2) PWM rates shall be adjustable by the user at the fixture if necessary to avoid any visible interference to video cameras and related equipment 10. CONTROL AND USER INTERFACE a. The fixture shall be USITT DMX 512A-compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 99 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard 1) All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably equipped control console 2) Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM 3) Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access or temperature monitoring via RDM shall not be compatible c. The fixture shall be equipped with multi-line LCD display for easy-to-read status reports and configuration changes d. The fixture shall be equipped with a six-button user-interface e. The fixture shall offer multiple DMX input profile options to include: 1) RGB - control of all individual LED colors via a three-channel profile (i) Red, Green, Blue 2) HSI – control of all individual LED colors via a three-channel profile (i) Hue, Saturation, Intensity 3) HSIC – control of all LED colors via a four-channel profile (i) Hue, Saturation, Intensity and Color Point (a) Color point provides variable color temperature settings 4) Direct – control of each individual color channel via an independent channel 5) A variable-rate strobe channel shall be provided f. The fixture shall offer three output settings 1) Boost mode - powers LEDs at maximum intensity and provides no compensation against LED ‘droop’ or intensity loss 2) Regulated mode – slightly restricts maximum LED intensity levels to compensate against LED droop 3) Protected mode – further restricts maximum LED intensity levels to compensate against LED droop and offer color consistency at highest permissible ambient temperatures (40C) 4) Fixtures that do not provide regulated and protected operation modes are not acceptable g. The fixture shall offer additional user-definable options to including but not limited to: 1) Display time out options 2) Loss of data behavior options 3) White point settings 4) Red-shift option for tungsten dimming emulation h. The fixture shall offer five Quick Set-Ups to allow user to rapidly select different combinations of the numerous user options based on the desired usage situation, to include: 1) General – for most situations 2) Stage – when emulating incandescent fixtures is desired 3) High Impact – when maximum output and effect is desired
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 100 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
4) XT Arch – when color consistency and architectural characteristics are desired. 5) Studio - when DMX or stand-alone of white light output is required with intensity, color temperature and color tint control parameters i. The fixture shall offer stand-alone functionality eliminating the need for a console 1) Fixture shall ship with 24 preset colors accessible as a stand- alone feature 2) Fixture shall ship with 12 Sequences accessible as a stand- alone feature 3) Each color and sequence can be modified by the end user 4) Fixtures can be linked together with standard DMX cables and controlled from designated master fixture (i) Up to 32 fixtures may be linked 5) Fixtures in a stand-alone state shall restore to the settings present prior to power cycling, eliminating the need for reprogramming 6) Fixtures without stand-alone operation features described in a, b, c, d, and e shall not be acceptable.
C. Color mixing or White-light Light Emitting Diode Profile fixture 1. General a. The fixture shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of intensity and color. The fixture shall be a ColorSource Spot or ColorSource Spot Deep Blue as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal. b. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility c. The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use d. The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX-512A standard 2. Physical a. The unit shall be constructed of rugged, die cast aluminum, free of burrs and pits. b. The following shall be provided: 1) Lens secured with silicone shock mounts 2) Shutter assembly shall allow for +/-25 rotation 3) 20 gauge stainless steel shutters 4) Interchangeable lens tubes for different field angles with Teflon guides for smooth tube movement 5) Sturdy integral die cast gel frame holders with two accessory slots, and a top-mounted, quick release gel frame retainer 6) Rugged steel yoke with two mounting positions allowing 300+ rotation of the fixture within the yoke 7) Positive locking, hand operated yoke clutch 8) Slot with sliding cover for motorized pattern devices or optional iris c. The housing shall have a rugged black powder coat finish
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 101 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) White or silver/gray powder coat finishes shall be available as color options 2) Other powder coat color options shall be available on request d. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be integral to each unit. e. The unit shall ship with: 1) Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard 2) 5’ cable with Neutrik PowerCon™ to choice of connector as standard 3) Gate diffuser 4) A-size pattern holder f. Available options shall include but not be limited to: 1) Bare-end, Stage-Pin or Twist-lock type-equipped power leads 2) PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking 3) Smooth Wash Diffuser for overlapping beams of light from multiple fixtures 3. Optical a. The light beam should have a 2-to-1 center-to-edge drop-off ratio b. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to: 1) Low gate and beam temperature 2) Sharp imaging through a three-plane shutter design c. The unit shall provide, but not be limited to: 1) 5, 10, 14, 19, 26, 36, 50, 70 and 90 degree field angles 2) High-quality pattern imaging 3) Sharp shutter cuts without halation 4) Shutter warping and burnout in normal use shall be unacceptable 5) Adjustable hard and soft beam edges d. 19, 26, 36, and 50 degree units shall have optional lens tubes available for precision, high-contrast imaging. e. Shall work with S4 LED CYC and Fresnel adapters 4. Environmental and Agency Compliance a. The fixture shall be ETL and cETL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the job site. b. The fixture shall be ETL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use c. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location use. 5. Thermal a. Fixture shall be equipped with a cooling fan. b. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems to maintain LED life to an average of 70% intensity after 54,000 hours of use 1) Thermal management shall include multiple temperature sensors within the housing to include: (i) LED array circuit board temperatures (ii) Fixture ambient internal temperature
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 102 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
c. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F) minimum, to 40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature. 6. Electrical a. The fixture shall be equipped with a 100V to 240V 50/60Hz internal power supply b. The fixture shall support power in and thru operation 1) Power in shall be via Neutrik® PowerCon™ input connector 2) Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® PowerCon ™ output connector 3) Fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker c. The fixture requires power from a non-dim source d. Fixtures shall have droop compensation to prevent thermal shift of color or intensity e. Power supply outputs shall have self-resetting current-limiting protection f. Power supply shall have power factor correction 7. LED Emitters a. The fixture shall contain a minimum of four different LED colors to provide color characteristics as described in the Color Section below. b. All LEDs used in the fixture shall be high brightness and proven quality from established and reputable LED manufacturers. 1) Fixture shall utilize Luxeon® Rebel™ LED emitters c. Manufacturer of LED emitters shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process to maintain color consistency. d. LED emitters should be rated for nominal 20,000-hour LED life to 70% intensity e. All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum three-hour burn-in test during manufacturing. f. LED system shall comply with all relevant patents 8. Calibration a. Fixture shall be calibrated at factory for achieve consistent color and intensity output between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins 1) Calibration data shall be stored on the control card as a permanent part of on-board operating system 2) All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to insure consistency 3) Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable 9. Color a. The fixture shall utilize an minimum of 60 LED emitters 1) These emitters shall be made up of Red, Green, Blue and Lime for ColorSource 2) These emitters shall be made up of Red, Green, Indigo and Lime for ColorSource Deep Blue 10. Dimming a. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high- resolution dimming.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 103 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. The fixture shall utilize an Incandescent dimming curve c. Dimming curve shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades. d. The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM) e. LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways: 1) PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related equipment 2) PWM shall be capable of being set via RDM to 25,000hz 11. Control and User interface a. The fixture shall be USITT DMX 512A-compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors or RJ45 connectors b. The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard 1) All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably equipped control console 2) Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM 3) Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access or temperature monitoring via RDM shall not be compatible c. The fixture shall be equipped with a 7-segment display d. The fixture shall be equipped with a three-button user-interface e. The fixture shall be controlled via RGB data input 1) 5-channel footprint (IRGBS) f. A variable-rate strobe channel shall be provided g. The fixture shall offer stand-alone functionality eliminating the need for a console 1) Fixture shall ship with 12 preset colors accessible as a stand- alone feature 2) Fixture shall ship with 5 sequences accessible as a stand-alone feature 3) Each color and sequence can be modified by the end user via RDM 4) Fixtures can be linked together with standard DMX cables and controlled from designated master fixture (i) Up to 32 fixtures may be linked 5) Fixtures in a stand-alone state shall restore to the settings present prior to power cycling, eliminating the need for reprogramming 6) Fixtures without stand-alone operation features described above shall not be acceptable.
D. Color mixing Light Emitting Diode Wash fixture 1. General a. The fixture shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of intensity and color. The fixture shall be a ColorSource Par or Colorsource Par Deep Blue as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 104 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility c. The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use d. The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX-512 A standard 2. Physical a. The fixture shall be contained in a rugged all-metal die-cast housing, free of burrs and pits. b. The housing shall have a rugged black powdercoat finish 1) White or silver/gray powdercoat finishes shall be available as color options 2) Other powdercoat color options shall be available on request c. Power supply, cooling and electronics shall be integral to each unit. d. Fixture housing shall provide two easy-access slots for secondary lenses and other accessories 1) Slots shall be equipped with locking retaining clip e. The unit shall ship with: 1) Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard 2) 5’ power lead with Edison connector as standard f. Available options shall include but not be limited to: 1) Floor stand conversion Kit 2) Bare-end, Stage-Pin or Twist-lock type-equipped power leads 3) PowerCon to PowerCon cables for fixture power linking 4) Multiple secondary lens options to include multiple angles in the following patterns: (i) Linear (ii) Round (iii) Oblong g. Light output shall be via a round aperture 1) Aperture and accessory slots shall accommodate standard 7.5” accessories such as used in other similar-sized fixtures 2) Accessories available as options shall include but not be limited to: (i) Gel/diffusion frames (ii) Top hats (iii) Barndoors (iv) Egg crate louvers (v) Concentric ring louvers (vi) Multiple secondary lensing options 3. ENVIRONMENTAL AND AGENCY COMPLIANCE a. The fixture shall be UL and cUL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the job site. b. The fixture shall be UL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use c. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location use. 4. THERMAL a. The fixture shall be cooled with a variable speed fan.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 105 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems to maintain LED life to an average of 70% intensity after 20,000 hours of use 1) Thermal management shall include multiple temperature sensors within the housing to include: (i) The LED array (ii) The control board c. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F) minimum, to 40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature. 5. ELECTRICAL a. The fixture shall be equipped with 100V to 240V 50/60 Hz internal power supply b. The fixture shall support power in and thru operation 1) Power in shall be via Neutrik® PowerCon™ input connector 2) Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® PowerCon ™ output connector 3) Fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker c. The fixture requires power from non-dim source d. Power supply outputs shall have self-resetting current limiting protection e. Power supply shall have power factor correction 6. LED Emitters a. The fixture shall contain 4 different LED colors to provide color characteristics as described in Section H below. b. All LEDs used in the fixture shall be high brightness and proven quality from established and reputable LED manufacturers. 1) Fixture shall utilize Luxeon® Z™ LED emitters c. Manufacturer of LED emitters shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process to maintain color consistency. d. LED emitters should be rated for nominal 20,000 hour LED life to 70% intensity e. All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum three-hour burn-in test during manufacturing. f. LED system shall comply with all relevant patents 7. CALIBRATION a. Fixture shall be calibrated at factory for achieve consistent color between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins 1) Calibration data shall be stored in the fixture as a permanent part of on-board operating system 2) All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to insure consistency 3) Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable 8. COLOR a. The fixture shall utilize an minimum of 40 LED emitters 1) These emitters shall be made up of Red, Green, Blue and Lime for ColorSource
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 106 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2) These emitters shall be made up of Red, Green, Indigo and Lime for ColorSource Deep Blue 3) 9. DIMMING a. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high- resolution dimming. b. The dimming curve shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades. c. The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM) d. LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways: 1) PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related equipment 2) PWM rates shall be adjustable by the user via RDM to avoid any visible interference to video cameras and related equipment 10. CONTROL AND USER INTERFACE a. The fixture shall be USITT DMX 512A-compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors b. The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard 1) All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably equipped control console 2) Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM 3) Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access or temperature monitoring via RDM shall not be compatible c. The fixture shall be equipped with a 7-segment display for easy-to-read status and control d. The fixture shall be equipped with a three-button user-interface e. The fixture shall offer RGB control f. The fixture shall operate in Regulated mode for droop compensation g. The fixture shall offer stand-alone functionality eliminating the need for a console 1) Fixture shall ship with 12 preset colors accessible as a stand- alone feature 2) Fixture shall ship with 5 Sequences accessible as a stand-alone feature 3) Each color and sequence can be modified by the end user 4) Fixtures can be linked together with standard DMX cables and controlled from designated master fixture (i) Up to 32 fixtures may be linked 5) Fixtures in a stand-alone state shall restore to the settings present prior to power cycling, eliminating the need for reprogramming 6) Fixtures without stand-alone operation features described in a, b, c, d, and e shall not be acceptable. E. Color mixing Light Emitting Diode Cyclorama fixture
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 107 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. General a. The fixture shall be a color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of intensity and color. The fixture shall be a ColorSource® CYC as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. or approved equal. b. All LED fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility c. The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use d. The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX512-A standard 2. Physical a. The fixture shall be contained in a rugged all-metal die-cast housing, free of burrs and pits. b. The housing shall have a rugged black powder coat finish 1) White or silver/gray powder coat finishes shall be available as color options 2) Other powder coat color options shall be available on request c. Power supply and electronics shall be integral to each unit. d. Fixture housing shall provide built in spill control e. Fixture shall operate directly on the ground or by hanging via yoke f. The unit shall ship with: 1) Theatrical-style hanging yoke as standard 2) 5’ power lead with Neutrik® PowerCON™ to Edison connector as standard g. Available options shall include but not be limited to: 1) DMX input via RJ45 connector h. Light output shall produce an asymmetrical beam 1) Lensing shall be designed to provide smooth coverage both horizontally and vertically for seamless blending from fixture to fixture 2) With a minimum setback from the cyclorama of 2’, the fixtures shall be able to achieve a 2-to-1 spacing ration and maintain smooth coverage 3. ENVIRONMENTAL AND AGENCY COMPLIANCE a. The fixture shall be UL and cUL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the job site. b. The fixture shall be UL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use c. The fixture shall be rated for IP-20 dry location use. 4. THERMAL a. The fixture shall be natural convection cooled and shall not use a fan b. The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems to maintain LED life to an average of 70% intensity after 50,000 hours of use 1) Thermal management shall include multiple temperature sensors within the housing to include: (i) The LED array (ii) The control board
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 108 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
c. The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F) minimum, to 40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature. 5. ELECTRICAL a. The fixture shall be equipped with 100V to 240V 50/60 Hz internal power supply b. The fixture shall support power in and thru operation 1) Power in shall be via Neutrik® PowerCON™ input connector 2) Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® PowerCON ™ output connector 3) Fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker c. The fixture requires power from non-dim source d. Power supply shall have power factor correction 6. LED Emitters a. The fixture shall contain 5 different LED colors to provide color characteristics as described in Section H below. b. All LEDs used in the fixture shall be high brightness and proven quality from established and reputable LED manufacturers. 1) Fixture shall utilize Luxeon® C™ LED emitters c. Manufacturer of LED emitters shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process to maintain color consistency. d. LED emitters should be rated for nominal 50,000 hour LED life to 70% intensity e. LED system shall comply with all relevant patents f. Fixtures shall have a flicker free mode that will set the LED refresh rate to 25,000 Hz for flicker free operation on camera 7. CALIBRATION a. Fixture shall be calibrated at factory for achieve consistent color between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins 1) Calibration data shall be stored in the fixture as a permanent part of on-board operating system 2) All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to ensure consistency 3) Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable b. Fixture shall have droop compensation to overcome thermal droop in the LEDs to maintain output levels and color point. 8. COLOR a. The fixture shall utilize a minimum of 42 LED emitters 1) These emitters shall be made up of Red, Green, Blue, Indigo and Lime 2) 9. DIMMING a. The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high- resolution dimming. b. The dimming curve shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 109 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
c. The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM) d. LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways: 1) PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related equipment 2) PWM rates shall be adjustable by the user via RDM to avoid any visible interference to video cameras and related equipment 10. CONTROL AND USER INTERFACE a. The fixture shall be USITT DMX512-A compatible via In and Thru 5-pin XLR connectors or RJ45 connectors b. The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard 1) All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably equipped control console 2) Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM 3) Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access or temperature monitoring via RDM shall not be compatible c. The fixture shall be equipped with a 7-segment display for easy-to-read status and control d. The fixture shall be equipped with a three-button user-interface e. The fixture shall offer multiple control modes including but not limited to: 1) RGB 2) 5 channel (IRGBS) 3) Direct 4) Single channel f. The fixture shall operate in Regulated mode for droop compensation g. The fixture shall offer stand-alone functionality eliminating the need for a console 1) Fixture shall ship with 12 preset colors accessible as a stand- alone feature 2) Fixture shall ship with 5 Sequences accessible as a stand-alone feature 3) Each preset can be modified by the end user 4) Fixtures can be linked together with standard DMX cables and controlled from designated master fixture (i) Up to 32 fixtures may be linked 5) Fixtures in a stand-alone state shall restore to the settings present prior to power cycling, eliminating the need for reprogramming 6) Fixtures without stand-alone operation features described in a, b, c, d, and e shall not be acceptable.
F. Automated Lighting 1. COLOR MIXING LIGHT EMITTING DIODE Moving head SPOT fixture a. General
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 110 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) The fixture shall be an additive color-mixing high-intensity LED illuminator with DMX control of intensity, color, pan, tilt, and pattern projection. The fixture shall be a Relevé Spot by ETC or approved equivalent. 2) All LED moving light fixtures shall be provided by a single manufacturer to ensure compatibility. 3) The fixture shall be UL 1573 listed for stage and studio use and comply with EN60598-2-17 standard per CE certification. 4) The fixture shall comply with the USITT DMX-512A standard. b. Physical or Mechanical 1) The fixture’s structural framing shall be constructed of rugged, 3/32” aluminum, free of burrs, pits, and finished with non- reflective coating. 2) Outer covers of head and yoke shall be constructed of ABS plastic with fine textured black surface and fastened to the head frame with captive fasteners. 3) The fixture dimensions shall be: (i) 803 mm (31.6”) from base of the enclosure to the tip of the lens baffling. (ii) 477 mm (18.8”) across the exterior dimensions of the yoke. (iii) The electronics enclosure shall be 330mm (13”) wide. (iv) Head length 589 mm (23.2”). (v) The fixture shall weigh 31.75 kg (70lbs). 4) The fixture shall be able to be either truss-mounted or set upright on a stable surface. Fixture shall be suitably designed for operation over or under mounted on a truss perpendicular to the ground as well as outrigged parallel to the ground. 5) The following shall be provided: (i) The fixture must include five (5) interchangeable rotating gobos. Fixtures that have non-interchangeable gobo patterns shall not be deemed acceptable. (a) Interchangeable rotating gobos shall have an outside diameter of 45 mm, image diameter of 36mm, and accept 0.5mm stainless steel or 1.1mm Glass Borofloat® gobos. (b) Rotating gobo systems must be able to index to any point on the 360 positioning of the gobo. (ii) The fixture shall have 540 degrees of pan and 270 degrees of tilt. Pan and tilt must be controlled with 16 bit control and utilize absolute position encoder sensors to guarantee correct step position. (a) The fixture shall have a pan speed of 3.6s for 180 degree movement. (b) The fixture shall have a tilt speed of 3.0s for 180 degree of movement.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 111 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(c) Pan and tilt locks that stop at 0, 45, and 90 degrees for service and handling. Pan and tilt locks are not intended to be engaged during transport in pre-rigged truss. (iii) A twenty (20) leaf iris which reduces the projection area by 93%. (iv) Frost system which softens the edges of the projection with a dual-flag surface that applies evenly across the beam and allows for variation in insertion time without reflections or uneven distribution of diffusion. (v) Automated 18-54 zoom and focus lens system. (vi) Rotating fixed pattern wheel shall allow for animation in two directions and shall contain an effect pattern made up of at least six (6) unique and continuous breakup patterns. Fixtures with animation wheels that are made up of a single pattern shall not be deemed acceptable. 6) The yoke arms must have fixed handles for fixture handling and manipulation. Fixtures with no handles on the yoke arms shall not be deemed acceptable. 7) Power Supply, cooling, and driver electronics shall be integral to each fixture. 8) Power supply module shall be easily removable and user replaceable. 9) Control/UI module shall be easily removable and shall have the option for battery power to allow fixture settings to be adjusted while module is removed. 10) The fixture shall ship with: (i) 152cm / 5’ Neutrik® powerCON™ to wire ferrule as standard. (ii) Two (2) rail design clamp brackets that facilitate attaching standard hanging hardware to the fixture base. 11) Available options shall include but not be limited to: (i) Grounded stage pin, or twist-lock type-equipped power leads. (ii) Neutrik® powerCON™ to Neutrik® powerCON™ cables for fixture power linking. c. Optical 1) The fixture shall produce up to 6,000 field lumens with all LEDs at full and in a wide zoom angle. 2) The fixture shall provide, but not be limited to: (i) Low gate and beam temperature. (ii) Sharp imaging on all gobo planes and iris planes. 3) The fixture shall provide, but not be limited to: (i) 18 through 54 degree field angles. (ii) High-quality pattern imaging. d. Environmental and Agency Compliance
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 112 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) The fixture shall be ETL and cETL LISTED and/or CE rated, and shall be so labeled when delivered to the job site. 2) The fixture shall be ETL LISTED to the UL1573 standard for stage and studio use. 3) The fixture shall be rated for IP20 dry location use. e. Thermal 1) The fixture shall be equipped with a cooling fan. 2) The fixture shall utilize advanced thermal management systems and maintain LED life to an average of 70% intensity after 35,000 hours of use. (i) Fan speed shall be capable of automatically adjusting based on thermal management needs. (a) The fixture shall provide three fan speed modes that are selectable via DMX and RDM. (ii) Thermal management shall include multiple temperature sensors within the housing to include: (a) LED array circuit board temperatures. (b) LED driver circuit board temperatures. (iii) Fixtures that do not provide active thermal monitoring and current management of LED circuits shall not be acceptable. 3) The fixture shall operate in an ambient temperature range of 0°C (32°F) minimum, to 40° C (104°F) maximum ambient temperature. 4) The fixture shall have droop compensation to prevent thermal shift of color or intensity. f. Electrical 1) The fixture shall be equipped with a 100VAC to 240VAC 50/60Hz auto-sensing removable power supply module. (i) The fixture shall draw a maximum of 2.9A at 100VAC and 1.2A at 240VAC. 2) The fixture shall support power in and thru operation. (i) Power in shall be via Neutrik® powerCON™ input connector. (ii) Power thru shall be via Neutrik ® powerCON™ output connector. (iii) The fixture power wiring and accessory power cables shall be rated to support linking of multiple fixtures up to the capacity of a 15A breaker. 3) The fixture requires power from a non-dimmed source. 4) Power supply outputs shall have self-resetting current-limiting protection. g. LED Emitters 1) The fixture shall contain a minimum of four different LED colors to provide color characteristics, as described in the color section below. 2) All LEDs used in the fixture shall be high brightness and proven quality from established and reputable LED manufacturers.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 113 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(i) The fixture shall utilize Luxeon® C LED emitters. 3) Manufacturer of LED emitters shall utilize an advanced production LED binning process to maintain color consistency. 4) LED emitters shall be rated for nominal 35,000-hour L70 rating. 5) All LED fixtures (100% of each lot) shall undergo a minimum 12-hour burn-in test during manufacturing. 6) LED system shall comply with all relevant patents. h. Calibration 1) The fixture shall be calibrated at factory to achieve consistent color and intensity output between fixtures built at different times and/or from different LED lots or bins. (i) Calibration data shall be stored on the control card as a permanent part of on-board operating system. (ii) All arrays, including replacement arrays shall be calibrated to the same standard to insure consistency. (iii) Fixtures not offering LED calibration shall not be acceptable. i. Color 1) The fixture shall utilize a minimum of 52 LED emitters. (i) These emitters shall be made up of red, green, indigo, and lime. j. Dimming 1) The LED system shall use 15-bit nonlinear scaling techniques for high-resolution dimming. 2) The fixture shall utilize an incandescent dimming curve. 3) Dimming curve shall be optimized for smooth dimming over longer timed fades. 4) The LED system shall be digitally driven using high-speed pulse width modulation (PWM). 5) LED control shall be compatible with broadcast equipment in the following ways: (i) PWM control of LED levels shall be imperceptible to video cameras and related equipment. (ii) PWM shall be capable of being set via UI and RDM to either 1.2khz or 25kHz. k. Control and User Interface 1) The fixture shall be USITT DMX 512A-compatible via in and thru 5-pin XLR connectors. 2) The fixture shall be compatible with the ANSI RDM E1.20 standard. (i) All fixture functions shall accessible via RDM protocol for modification from suitably equipped control console. (ii) Temperature sensors within the luminaire shall be viewable in real time via RDM and UI.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 114 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(iii) Fixtures not offering RDM compatibility, feature set access, or temperature monitoring via RDM shall not be compatible. 3) The fixture shall be equipped with multi-line LCD display for easy-to-read status reports and configuration changes. (i) Display must have a feature to battery power the menu when the fixture is unplugged to allow fixture settings to be adjusted, including DMX address. 4) The fixture shall be equipped with a five-button user interface. 5) The fixture shall offer two DMX control profiles. (i) Direct DMX control profile shall have 24 channel control. (ii) Simple DMX control profile shall have 20 channel control. l. Initialization 1) The fixture shall be fitted with high resolution absolute position encoders on the pan and tilt axes such that initialization on power up or reset can be accomplished with zero or minimal movement of these axis. 2) Fixtures not offering absolute position sensors and that are required to move the pan and tilt axis home to fixed sensor positions or end stops in order to initialize shall not be acceptable. 3) The time to fully initialize the fixture from power on or reset shall be no more than 35 seconds 4.11 NETWORKING CUE LIGHT SYSTEM
A. General 1. Cue lights shall be an Ethernet-based system. The cue light system shall be the CueSystem range as manufactured by Electronic Theatre Controls, Inc. or equal. 2. The system shall provide bi-directional control of up to 50 connected CueSystem devices. Output shall be distributed over a 10/100 MB Ethernet network using TCP protocols. 3. The system shall incorporate a network based device discovery utility using UDP protocols to provide fast and easy setup and configuration of all connected devices. 4. Supported Device Discovery features shall include: a. Discovery and Identification of CueSystem devices. b. Setting of Network IP address and subnet range. c. Viewing of device firmware version and MAC address 5. A maximum of 10,000 cues may be contained in non-volatile electronic memory and stored locally to any network connected CueSystem Control Desk or Playback Unit. 6. Direct operation of CueSystem channels shall be provided via a dedicated hardware Control Desk or a virtual desk running within the CueSystem software application. 7. Playback of pre-recorded cues shall be possible via a dedicated hardware Playback Unit or the ‘live screen’ running within the CueSystem software application.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 115 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
8. Dedicated hardware outstations shall be provided providing synchronous display of information from the CueSystem Control Desks, Playback Unit and/or software application. B. Control Desk 1. A hardware Control Desk for the purpose of manual operation of cue light channels, having the following properties: 2. Physical a. Desktop form factor available in 3 channel variants: 1) 4 Channels 2) 8 Channels 3) 12 Channels b. Rackmount form factor available in 2 channel variants: 1) 8 Channels 2) 12 Channels c. The Control Desk shall contain a series of buttons providing the following core functionality: 1) Channel Standby – A series of red, illuminated buttons activating the red LED of the corresponding, patched cue light outstation. 2) Channel Preset – A series of yellow, illuminated buttons allowing multiple channels to be preset (or grouped) and activated simultaneously via an overall master ‘GO’ button. 3) Channel ‘GO’ – A series of green, illuminated buttons activating the green LED of the corresponding, patched cue light outstation. d. The Control Desk shall be manufactured from aluminum and finished with a fine texture, black, powder coat paint. e. Control Desk buttons shall operate silently and provide adequate space between buttons providing eyes-free, tactile navigation of the product. f. A white, wipe clean, strip shall be provided between the standby and preset buttons allowing an operator to use an appropriate pen to note channel allocation free text. g. Control Desks shall have overall weight and dimensions no larger than: h. Desktop: 1) 4 Channel: 5.6 x 8.3 x 7.3 inches (145 x 210 x 185mm) 2.95lbs (1.35kgs) 2) 8 Channel: 5.6 x 14.7 x 7.3 inches (145 x 375 x 185mm) 5.15lbs (2.35kgs) 3) 12 Channel: 5.6 x 19.1 x 7.3 (145 x 485 x 185mm) 5.75lbs (2.60kgs) i. Rackmount: 1) 8 Channel: 5.3 x 19.0 x 4.9 inches (135 x 485 x 125mm) 3.85lbs (1.75kgs) 2) 12 Channel: 5.3 x 19.0 x 4.9 inches (135 x 485 x 125mm) 4.35lbs (2.00kgs) j. The rear of the Control Desk shall include the following I/O ports:
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 116 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) Ethernet Port for bidirectional communication with other CueSystem devices using TCP/IP and/or UDP 2) RS232 serial port for unidirectional control of CueSystem devices via externally generated serial strings 3) 2 x USB ports for factory commissioning processes 4) Switched and fused IEC port for connection of 100-240V AC power (required for operation) C. Playback Unit 1. A hardware Playback Unit for the purpose of replaying pre-recorded cue light scenes, available as in desktop or rack-mounting variant. 2. Physical a. The Playback Unit shall contain a series of buttons providing the following core functionality: 1) ‘Go’ button (one on desktop, two on rack-mount) – provides single button execution of pre-recorded cues in sequential forward order. 2) Back button – provides single button execution of a pre- recorded cues in reverse order. 3) Cue Navigation buttons shall be provided to scroll through pre-recorded cues. One pair of buttons shall provide up/down scrolling of a single cue at a time. A second pair of buttons shall provide up/down scrolling of ten cues at a time. 4) A record/update button shall be provided to allow single button updating of the active state of all cue light outstations to the current selected cue. b. A two-line, backlit LCD display shall be provided showing the current and next cue number along with any pre-recorded, free text information contained within the cue up to a maximum of 28 characters. c. The Playback Unit shall be manufactured from aluminum and finished with a fine texture, black, powder coat paint. d. Playback Unit buttons shall operate silently and provide adequate space between buttons providing eyes-free, tactile navigation of the product. e. Playback Units shall have overall weight and dimensions no larger than: f. Desktop: 1) 3.4 x 7.9 x 5.9 inches (90 x 200 x 150mm) 1.85lbs (0.85kgs) g. Rackmount: 1) 1.71 x 19.0 x 5.5 inches (45 x 485 x 140mm) 3.85lbs (1.75kgs) h. The rear of the Playback Unit shall include the following I/O ports: 1) Ethernet Port for bidirectional communication with other CueSystem devices using TCP/IP and/or UDP 2) RS232 serial port for unidirectional control of CueSystem devices via externally generated serial strings 3) 2 x USB ports for factory commissioning processes 4) Switched and fused IEC port for connection of 100-240V AC power (required for operation) D. CueSpider Outstation
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 117 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. A hardware cue light outstation for the purpose of displaying standby and ‘Go’ information in the form of red and green LED’s. CueSpider Outstations are controlled via the CueSystem Control Desk, software application and/or Playback Unit. Two variants of the CueSpider outstation shall be made available – CueSpider and CueSpider Lite: 2. CueSpider a. Physical 1) The CueSpider Outstation shall contain two LED indications/buttons providing the following core functionality: 2) Red Standby – provides a visual cue to the recipient to standby to receive a ‘Go’ command. The Red LED can be configured to flash or remain static dependent on preference. When a flashing system is configured, the Red LED shall double as an ‘acknowledge’ button instantly stopping the flashing action and indicating to the Stage Manager that the receiver has received the Standby command and is ready to proceed. 3) Green ‘Go’ – provides a visual cue to the recipient to execute the prescribed cue b. A three-line OLED display shall be provided showing the user-definable device name, current and next cue number along with any pre-recorded, free text information contained within the cue up to a maximum of 17 characters. c. The CueSpider Outstation shall be manufactured from aluminum and finished with a fine texture, black, powder coat paint. d. The CueSpider Outstation buttons shall operate silently and provide adequate space between buttons providing eyes-free, tactile navigation of the product. e. The CueSpider Outstation shall have overall dimensions no larger than 4.9 x 2.6 x 1.7 inches (125 x 65 x 45mm) and a maximum product weight of 0.46lbs (0.21kgs) f. The base of the CueSpider Outstation shall include 2 x etherCON connectors for IN/THRU connection of Ethernet data and Power over Ethernet (PoE) g. A pre-drilled ‘keyhole’ shall be included on the rear chassis plate of the CueSpider Outstation allowing the device to be hooked onto appropriate mounting hardware. 3. CueSpider Lite a. Physical 1) The CueSpider Lite Outstation shall contain two LED indications/buttons providing the following core functionality: 2) Red Standby – provides a visual cue to the recipient to standby to receive a ‘Go’ command. The Red LED can be configured to flash or remain static dependent on preference. When a flashing system is configured, the Red LED shall double as an ‘acknowledge’ button instantly stopping the flashing action and indicating to the Stage Manager that the receiver has received the Standby command and is ready to proceed. 3) Green ‘Go’ – provides a visual cue to the recipient to execute the prescribed cue
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 118 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
b. A three-line OLED display shall be provided showing the user-definable device name, current and next cue number along with any pre-recorded, free text information contained within the cue up to a maximum of 17 characters. c. The CueSpider Lite Outstation shall be manufactured from aluminum and finished with a fine texture, black, powder coat paint. d. The CueSpider Lite Outstation buttons shall operate silently and provide adequate space between buttons providing eyes-free, tactile navigation of the product. e. The CueSpider Lite Outstation shall have overall dimensions no larger than 4.9 x 2.6 x 1.7 inches (125 x 65 x 45mm) and a maximum product weight of 0.45lbs (0.20kgs) f. The base of the CueSpider Lite Outstation shall include 1 x etherCON connectors for connection of Ethernet data and Power over Ethernet (PoE) g. A pre-drilled ‘keyhole’ shall be included on the rear chassis plate of the CueSpider Outstation allowing the device to be hooked onto appropriate mounting hardware. E. CueSystem Application Software 1. All CueSystem user options including patching, recording and playback features shall be configurable via a freely downloadable companion software application. The software shall provide the following features: 2. Patch a. A graphical user interface providing point and click functionality shall be provided to facilitate rapid association of a Control Desk channel to a connected outstation. b. Free text titling of control channels shall be provided allowing easy identification of outstation location and/or use. The free text title shall also be displayed in the display of a network connected outstation if present. c. Real time feedback of connected device status allowing operator to determine if a device is online. d. An outstation ‘identify’ feature shall be available allowing the operator to trigger a factory preset message on the screen of a network connected outstation for visual location of device. 3. Device Discovery a. A device discovery utility shall be provided to facilitate easy configuration of network connected CueSystem devices. b. Device discovery shall include an automatically populating list of available devices. c. All required network configuration options shall be available within the Device Discovery utility including IP address, subnet mask and association of devices to a user specified CueSystem master controller. 4. Overview a. An overview screen shall be provided allowing a user to import any JPG or PNG image file as a background. b. Simple drag and drop icons symbolizing active network connected outstations shall be freely located over the top of the imported image providing a virtual layout of the connected devices. c. Outstation icon graphics shall provide real-time reporting of current status of connected devices for convenient system monitoring.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 119 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
5. Program a. Multiple virtual Control Desks may be added to the program screen providing simple partitioning of channels if required. b. Cue list entry with free text naming of cues shall be provided allowing operator to use custom references c. A function to insert a new cue or delete a current cue shall be provided d. A function to renumber the entire cue stack shall be provided allowing the operator to sequentially renumber all cues in whole numbers. e. No forced behavioral entry. Operator shall be free to program any combination of available channels and cue light colors. f. Updating of all changes to the designated system master controller shall be made in real-time when connected. g. A live playback screen shall be made available providing simple, clutter- free display of cue list, current and next cue information. A GO and BACK virtual button shall be provided allowing execution of stored cues. h. A blind preview option shall be made available providing the operator with a local preview of programmed cue data without outputting information to any connected network devices. 6. Help a. An onboard, interactive help system shall be provided b. An ‘about’ menu detailing firmware versions of all, currently connected CueSystem devices shall be provided.
4.12 ARCHITECTURAL LED RUNNING LIGHTS
A. General 1. The instrument shall be a BluesSystem luminaire as manufactured by ETC, Inc., or approved equal. 2. The product shall be controlled via an external, proprietary power supply from the BluesSystem range of products (see section E below). 3. The product shall be provided with a minimum warranty of 5 years full fixture coverage and 10 years LED array coverage B. Physical 1. The product shall be constructed of an injection molded poly-carbonate material with enclosed LED emitter and electronics sealed in place using an epoxy resin to form one complete fixture. 2. The luminaire: a. Shall have pre-installed factory fitted reflectors or lenses for different beam angles as specified below. b. Shall have 3 factory installed screw terminals accepting allowing low voltage connection to the separate power supply. 3. The luminaire shall be offered in multiple variants as follows: a. Beam: 1) Round form factor with shallow profile no greater than 1” in height housing a 49mm optical lens providing fixed beam angle options of the following values: (i) VNSP (approx. 5 degrees)
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 120 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
(ii) NSP (approx. 10 degrees) (iii) MFL (approx. 20 degrees) (iv) WFL (approx. 50 degrees) 2) Testing to UL1598 and CSA22.2 (No. 250) standard and listed with a 3rd-party laboratory 3) 2 x holes at 2” (51mm) spacing for mechanical securement. b. Dome: 1) Round form factor with shallow profile no greater than 1.5” in height housing integrated dome optical lens providing 2 options of diffusion as follows: (i) Frosted Lens (ii) Opaque Lens 2) Testing to UL1598 and CSA22.2 (No. 250) standard and listed with a 3rd-party laboratory 3) 2 x holes at 2” (51mm) spacing for mechanical securement. C. Optical 1. The luminaire shall contain integral optics to provide various beam options as detailed in section 3. 2. The luminaire shall contain a single color Blue LED. Other single color LED’s shall be available by custom order. D. LED 1. The luminaire shall utilize a single Blue LED emitter. 2. The LED shall be rated for an average of 70% output after 50,000 hours of use 3. The Luminaire shall have an expected average power consumption of less than 4W 4. The Luminaire shall have a minimum output of a. BlueBeam VNSP: 9 field lumens b. BlueBeam NSP: 8.5 field lumens c. BlueBeam MFL: 9 field lumens d. BlueBeam WFL: 11 field lumens e. BlueDome Opaque Lens: 2 field lumens f. BlueDome Frosted Lens: 3 field lumens E. Power Supply 1. The BluesSystem luminaire shall require the use of a separate BluesSystem power supply. 2. The BluesSystem power supply shall be manufactured from a cold rolled steel enclosure finished in a fine texture, high temperature black powder coat paint and be available in 2 physical variants: a. 1-Zone power supply capable of providing power and control for up to 10 BluesSystem luminaires on a single circuit. The 1-Zone power supply shall be a wall mount only product listed to UL1598/CSA22.2 No.250. b. 6-Zone power supply capable of providing power and control for up to 60 BluesSystem luminaires across 6 circuits. The 6-Zone power supply shall be available as a wall mount product (listed to UL1598/CSA22.2 No.250) or 19” rack mount product (listed to UL2108/CS22.2 No.9) 3. The power supply shall have the following electrical properties: a. 1-Zone power supply
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 121 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1) 100-240V AC 50/60Hz Input 2) 24V DC Output b. 6-Zone power supply 1) 100-240V AC 50/60Hz Input 2) 36V DC Output 4. The BluesSystem power supply shall have the following control options: a. 1-Zone power supply 1) Switched (Dry Contact Input) via internal terminal blocks 2) DMX512-A (ANSI E1.11-2008) in and through via internal terminal blocks b. 6-Zone power supply 1) Switched (Dry Contact Input) via internal terminal blocks 2) 0-10V Analog control via internal terminal blocks 3) DMX512-A (ANSI E1.11-2008) in and through via internal terminal blocks 3. INSTALLATION 4.1 GENERAL
A. Verify that job conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify Architect of any existing condition, which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions.
B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on shop drawings.
C. Verify that mechanical, electrical, and other items affecting work of this section are in place and ready to receive the work.
4.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations.
B. Install work in accordance highest industry standards. Handle materials to avoid dents and other damages.
C. Set and secure materials and components rigid, plumb, and square.
4.3 WARRANTY
A. Theatrical installer to provided 3 annual service inspections of the rigging equipment.
B. Warranty on all theatrical equipment is to begin upon substantial completion of construction or upon commissioning of the dimming system.
PART 5: COUNTERWEIGHT RIGGING SYSTEM GENERAL
5.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install manually operated rigging line sets as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified in the Rigging Schedule included in the drawings.
5.02 RELATED SECTIONS
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 122 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
A. Verify related specifications sections under Division 5. B. Verify related specification sections under Section 11 – Equipment. C. Verify related specification sections under Section 26 – Electrical
5.03 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01, unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: manufacturer's specifications and technical data. C. Shop Drawings: indicating dimensions, general construction, and modifications. D. Contract Closeout Submittals: comply with Section 01, including operating and maintenance manuals.
5.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. MANUFACTURER 1. Only product from the Pre-Qualified Theatre Rigging Manufacturers shall be permitted in bid submissions in this Section. Proposals from Manufacturers not pre-qualified in this Specification requesting status of Qualified to Bid shall conform with General Conditions of the Contract. The decision of the Architect/Consultant shall be final.
B. SAMPLES 1. Manufacturers shall provide products as specified. Specified part numbers are provided herein to provide potential bidders additional information and clarification. Bidders must meet or exceed specified standards.
2. Other manufacturers must submit, at least 10 days prior to bid, complete drawings, samples of load bearing components, and equipment data for this entire scope of work.
3. The initial sample submittal shall be the basis upon which the qualifications of the stage equipment bid will be determined. Only one (1) sample submittal from any given contractor will be permitted. Subsequent quality escalation through repeated sample submittals from the same Contractor will not be allowed nor will modification of the original samples be permitted.
4. All samples must be accompanied by strength test data indicating Recommended Working Load and Design Factor of equipment in order for the manufacturer to be considered for substitution.
5. The Architect or Consultant reserves the right to make such examination of the samples, as he may consider necessary to determine their quality and compliance with the Specification, even to the destruction of the samples, and such determination by the Architect or Consultant shall be final. The acceptable samples shall be retained for comparison with equipment ultimately furnished and will be returned afterward to the Contractor at their request and at their expense. Contractors will not be allowed to examine the samples of another Contractor.
6. Samples for submittal shall not be assembled with rivets, but with threaded connections to facilitate easy disassembly for inspection.
7. Samples for submittal are: a) Loft block b) Arbor c) Rope Lock d) Track section, minimum one foot (1’-0”) long and maximum 3 feet (3’-0”) long, one (1) single and one (1) master carrier.
C. RIGGING CONTRACTORS 1. Only Pre-qualified Stage Rigging Sub-contractors shall be permitted to submit bids for the Work of this Section. Proposals from contractors/Manufacturers not pre-qualified in
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 123 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
this Specification requesting status of Qualified to Bid shall conform with General Conditions of the Contract. The decision of the Architect shall be final.
5.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI C1 National Electric Code. B. Design factors 1. Recognized codes: a) All equipment shall be manufactured to comply with the standards listed herein, and any applicable recognized codes (or any applicable jurisdictional regulation, where the requirements of such regulation are more stringent).
2. Design factors: a) Unless modified by other sections of this document, other codes listed, or governing bodies with jurisdiction over a particular facility, the factors listed in Table 1 shall be used as minimums for design purposes, but shall not serve as a substitution for evaluation and determination by a qualified engineering professional. Design factor ratios shown are versus tensile (ultimate) strength.
5.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience producing similar equipment. B. Manufacturer shall be registered ISO 9001 compliant with an independent certification agency approved by the International Organization for Standardization. C. Manufacturer shall maintain Risk Assessment Reports under its ISO 9001 charter. A listing of Product Risk Assessment Reports shall be included as a part of the bid package. The listing shall include: manufacturer’s name, ISO identification number, product description, product part number, risk assessment report number, date of filing of the risk assessment report. A sample risk assessment report of one of the products of the Manufacturer shall also be included. Any bid submission that is not accompanied by this list and sample shall be disqualified.
5.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Package and ship in accordance to manufacturer's recommendations. B. Store in compliance to manufacturer's instructions.
5.08 WORK BY RIGGING INSTALLER
A. Provide and Install (as defined in this specification and accompanying drawings) 1. 5 Motorized Electrics 2. 2 Motorized Variable Speed Hoists 3. 23 counterweight rigging line sets, 4. 3 bi-parting traveler tracks, 5. 3 pairs of leg drape tracks, 6. Counterweight bricks sufficient in quantity to load each counterweight arbor with pipe weight and to 75% of arbor net capacity. 7. 5 Lighting Battens for motorized electric sets. 8. 2 Battens for General Purpose motorized hoist sets. 9. 23 Battens for counterweight rigging sets. 10. 1 Fire Curtain System
5.09 WORK BY OTHERS A. Division 05 1. All structure, beams and bracing for the rigging system. 2. All structure, beams, materials, and bracing for catwalks, service ways, loading bridge, grids and walking surfaces as shown on the plans and required for the rigging system.
5.10 COORDINATION
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 124 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
A. Determine specific locations for installation of line sets.
5.11 COUNTERWEIGHT RIGGING AND FIRE CURTAIN EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BY THE FOLLOWING APPROVED MANUFACTURER:
Thern Stage Equipment 5912 Industrial Park Drive Winona, MN 55987 Phone: 800-553-2204
Or approved equal
5.12 THE FIRE CURTAIN AND RELATED FINISHING EQUIPMENT SHALL BE BY THE FOLLOWING APPROVED MANUFACTURER:
Thermotex Industries, Inc. Greenville, SC Phone: 800-898-8787
Or approved eqaul
PART 2: PART 3: PART 4: PART 5: 5.01 5.02 5.03 5.04 5.05 5.06 5.07 5.08 5.09 5.10 5.11 5.12 5.13 THE APPROVED INSTALLERS SHALL BE:
a Barbizon Lighting Company, Atlanta GA
b Magnum, Atlanta GA
c Stage Front, Atlanta GA
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 125 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
PART 6: PRODUCTS 6.01 COUNTERWEIGHT RIGGING SYSTEM A. Head blocks 1. Construction a) Block assemblies shall consist of a housing that encompasses one or more sheaves with bearing, and one or more shafts. Lines shall be prevented from unintentionally leaving the grooves. Provisions shall be made for accurately mounting the block assembly to the structural framing in a secure and safe manner. b) Shafts shall be fabricated from cold finished steel with a minimum Yield Strength of 310,230 KPa (45,000 psi). Shafts shall be installed so that no thread contacts the bearing or sheave housing. Unless specifically designed to rotate, shafts shall be locked against rotation within the block housing. Shaft nuts shall have a minimum rating of SAE J429 Grade 2. Shafts shall not move axially. c) All grooves on a sheave shall have equal pitch diameters. d) The sheaves shall be of nylon construction and shall have grooves for the purchase line and the required number of loft lines. e) See Section labeling and Marking for labeling requirements.
2. Underhung a) Underhung head blocks shall mount to the bottom side of the structural framing with the purchase and lift lines passing around the sheave below the mounting base. The block shall be designed to facilitate the passage of lift lines from the loft block to the lifting and support mechanism.
3. Mounting a) Provisions shall be made for accurately mounting the block assembly to the supporting structure in a secure and safe manner. The mounting shall be designed to prevent block movement and prohibit loosening of block or mounting hardware over time by either load or vibration. b) When attaching blocks, the anchors shall be selected and installed according to both the manufacturer's recommendations and local code requirements, for the loads and the materials into which they are inserted. c) Mounting clips shall be constructed and sized for the block load and mounting condition. They shall be installed so that the block cannot shift on the support structure. When clips are used to grip a beam flange, the clip shall deflect not more than 3mm (7/64 inch) when fully clamped at the block manufacturer’s recommended torque values.
B. Loft blocks 1. Construction a) Loft blocks shall meet the requirements of Section Head Blocks. b) All sheaves shall have the required number of grooves to support the loft line descending from it and to support all loft lines passing over the sheave and on to the other loft blocks in the block set. Loft blocks with idlers or sag bars to support lines are not acceptable.
2. Underhung a) Underhung blocks shall mount to the bottom side of the structural framing with the lift line passing over the sheave below the mounting base. The block shall be designed to facilitate the passage of lift line wire ropes between the load and the head block.
3. Mounting a) Mounting shall be done in accordance with Section Head Blocks: Mounting.
C. Mule blocks 1. Construction
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 126 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a) Mule blocks shall meet the requirements of Section Head Blocks. If field conditions require, the assembly shall be adjustable to maintain proper fleet angle alignment of the lift lines. The block shall lock in position after final adjustment, so it is not supported by wire rope tension.
2. Mounting a) Mountings shall meet the requirements of Section Mounting.
D. Tension blocks 1. Construction a) Tension blocks shall meet the requirements of Section Head Blocks. 2. Mounting a) Tension blocks shall be mounted in a manner that prevents interference between the purchase line and any other system or structural element. b) Tension block mountings shall meet the requirements of Section 2.01 Head Blocks Item C Mounting, or shall use guide shoes when mounting to guide rails. If guide shoes are used, they shall be fabricated to permit block travel along the guide mechanism without the use of tools. Lubrication shall not be required for either the guide shoes or the guide mechanism. The guide shoes shall prevent the tension block from releasing when the counterweight set is operated, but shall also allow readjustment of tension when so intended.
E. Battens 1. Typical batten a) The typical batten shall be fabricated using materials that support the design loads in accordance with the requirements of this standard. b) Battens exceeding one standard pipe length shall be joined using internal splicing sleeves. Threaded couplers shall not be permitted. Spliced battens shall have at least the same overall capacity, deflection, and strength as the component pipe. Battens shall be coated with a rust resistant finish. A minimum of 100 mm (4 inches) at each end of the batten shall be permanently marked with an approved OSHA color, except in architecturally sensitive areas. c) The batten shall be capable of supporting at minimum 45 Kg/m (30 lbs/ft) of uniformly distributed load. Battens shall be capable of sustaining a point load of 45 Kg (100 pounds) at mid-span between any two lift lines with a maximum span deflection of 1/180 of the span. d) See Section labeling and Marking for labeling requirements.
2. Alternate batten constructions a) Alternative batten and splicing designs that meet the intent of this standard shall be deemed acceptable. Deviations from the typical construction shall require alternative batten sizing and design.
b) Engineering specifications for all truss-batten systems shall be developed to meet the performance criteria of the specific application.
F. Batten connection hardware 1. All hardware types and applications shall be based upon load parameters, stress factors, and system design. All hardware shall be installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. Single-batten clamps a) Batten clamps shall be made from steel or other ductile materials. Clamps shall fully wrap the circumference (or perimeter, for non-circular cross sections) of the batten, and shall provide a positive resistance to rotational loads. The clamp shall permit attachment to the lift line using hardware specifically designed for the connection type, and in a manner that meets the criteria of Section Design Factors. Batten clamps shall not have sharp edges or corners.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 127 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
3. Multiple-batten clamps a) The same criteria shall apply if more than one batten, or combination of battens and electrical raceways, are connected by batten clamps. Each batten in the assembly shall conform to the requirements in Section Battens. Labeling as required by Section Battens shall be based on the total assembly, including all battens, connections, and other factors. Unless specifically designed to carry loads, electrical raceways shall not be considered a structural component when determining load ratings.
G. Counterweight arbors 1. Counterweight arbor shall be a Brickhouse Series arbor as manufactured or supplied by Thern Stage Equipment of Winona, Minnesota. Only products meeting or exceeding these specifications shall be accepted as alternates. The arbor shall be: a) FL6 series for 8 inch center T-guide wall.
2. The arbor shall be a front-loading type. Side loading arbors are not acceptable. 3. The arbor shall enclose the counterweight bricks on three sides. Arbors that do not enclose the counterweight bricks are not acceptable. 4. The arbor shall have a spring activated self-closing lock bar to prevent bricks from sliding out the front of the arbor. The lock bar shall engage and lock in the slot or indentation at the front of the counterweight bricks in the event the bricks slide forward in the arbor. 5. The arbor shall have shelves welded in place no more than 24 inches apart. Arbors requiring spreader plates are not acceptable. Arbors without shelves are not acceptable. 6. The arbor shelves shall impose an angle on the counterweight bricks causing them to be slanted toward the back of the arbor. 7. The arbor shall be single purchase and shall have tie off points for up to 10 loft lines and for one ¾ inch purchase line. 8. The arbor shall be delivered at pipe weight. Pipe weight may be achieved by the delivering an arbor that is pipe weight and/or by the addition of counterweights. 9. The arbor shall be sized to accommodate counterweights as indicated in the Rigging Schedule, which is included in the drawings. 10. The arbor shall be designed in such a way that up to three arbors can be bolted together and operated as a single arbor, with each arbor carrying full compartments of counterweight bricks. 11. Counterweight arbors shall be designed to hold weights for balancing loads in a manner that permits safe handling and easy access while retaining the counterweights within the arbor, even in the case of unexpected impact. Arbor frames and fittings shall be of materials having ductile properties that deform plastically without fracturing. 12. All counterweight arbor tops shall be equipped with attachment points for the lift lines and purchase lines, and the attachment points shall be sized so that terminations do not rest on, pinch, or otherwise bind adjacent terminations. 13. Counterweight arbors shall be designed to hold counterweights as described in Section Counterweights, and shall be designed to hold such counterweights without dislodging in the event of unexpected impact loads. 14. The inside of the counterweight arbor bottom frame shall be configured so that the counterweights rest without rocking. Counterweights shall not be permitted to rest on any bolt, nut, fastener, or other mounting hardware. 15. The arbor frame shall contain guide assemblies for engaging guide rail systems. Guide assemblies shall run freely, and engage the rail assembly in a manner that prevents arbors from disengaging under normal usage. The guide assemblies shall be designed to minimize noise and friction. 16. See Section labeling and Marking for labeling requirements.
H. Counterweights
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 128 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. Counterweights shall be made of steel or other materials having ductile properties that will deform plastically without fracturing. 2. The weights shall be free from sharp edges. 3. The counterweights shall have an oblong shaped hole to be used as a handle cut toward one end. The same end shall have a slight notch cut. This notch accommodates the locking gate. 4. Counterweights shall be of dimensions and shapes that can be safely handled by an average worker, and shall vary in size by no more than 3 mm (1/8 inch). 5. Individual counterweights shall not weigh more than 13.6Kg (30 lbs). 6. The use of cast iron or other materials shall be acceptable only when meeting the requirements of paragraph (A).
I. Guide rails 1. The minimum spacing between the guide rails shall be such that adjacent counterweights or obstructions cannot come into contact with each other under normal operating conditions. 2. Guide rail systems shall consist of minimum 38 mm x 38 mm x 4.7 mm (1-1/2 inch x 1- 1/2 inch x 3/16 inch) aluminum T-bar, rigidly fastened to a horizontal supporting structure at not more than five-foot intervals. Other sizes, profiles and metals shall be permitted for guide systems as long as they meet the operational criteria of this standard. 3. Guide rails shall be attached to steel support members located perpendicular to the guide rails. 4. All splices shall be finished in a manner that provides smooth transition between the abutted edges, without offset, warping or twisting of the rails. 5. Guide rail horizontals shall be rigidly attached to the building structure so that the guide rails cannot move in any direction. 6. Guide rail horizontals shall also be equipped with bracing where required to maintain rigidity of the guide system. The bottom support shall be bolted or anchored to the floor using anchorages specifically designed for the loads, mounting surface and conditions. 7. Stop battens or bars shall be attached where they will provide a secure stop for the arbors at their designated upper and lower limits of travel, and shall be structurally attached in locations that prevent interference by the arbor or stop, with any other component of the system. The bottom stop shall be located above the level of the tension blocks and shall be capable of supporting the weight of a fully loaded arbor, plus an additional 22.6 Kg (50 lbs) of allowable load imbalance. The top stop shall be capable of supporting the weight of a batten when loaded to the capacity of its arbor, plus an additional 22.6 Kg (50 lbs) of allowable load imbalance. Hardwood bumpers shall be bolted to the impact face of both stop assemblies, or shall be permitted to attach to the top and bottom of the arbor assembly. 8. Head blocks shall be positioned over the guide rails so that the support lines are plumb and the counterweight arbor does not impose a horizontal force on the guide system.
J. Locking rails 1. The locking rail shall be constructed from structural steel shapes and shall consist of a top railing and its supports. 2. The rail top shall be drilled to receive the rope locks on the required centers. 3. The rail shall be designed to accept either the anticipated loads imposed by the counterweight sets, or 34 Kg (75 pounds) per rope lock or concentrated loads of 227 Kg (500 pounds) at the midpoint between each locking rail upright, whichever is greater. 4. It shall also be designed to absorb a horizontal load as dictated by system design and applicable codes. 5. If not on the rope locks, the locking rails shall have an individual, permanent number or name displayed at each rope lock. Provisions shall be made for the temporary display of secondary descriptions. 6. The rail shall be attached to the building structure using bolts or anchors specifically sized and designed for the loads, mounting surfaces, and conditions, or shall be welded. 7. All anchorages and weldments shall fully resist anticipated loads, without loosening. 8. See Section labeling and Marking for labeling requirements.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 129 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
K. Outrigger batten 1. The outrigger batten, when used, shall be mounted so it does not interfere with the movement of purchase lines, or other building equipment. 2. The batten shall be rigidly mounted to the guide wall, or directly to the building structure. The batten shall run the full length of the locking rail.
L. Rope locks 1. Rope locks shall remain locked once the rope lock handle is placed in the locked position. 2. Rope locks shall not require two hands to unlock and operate. 3. A rope lock shall be able to sustain an out of balance condition of 22.6 Kg (50 pounds). 4. Rope lock shall allow the handline to slip when the preset imbalance limit has been exceeded so as to indicate an imbalance prior to becoming unmanageable. 5. Rope locks shall allow slippage of the handline above the preset imbalance limit without degradation of the rope. 6. Rope locks shall have an integral mechanism designed to prevent accidental release. 7. Rope locks shall allow for lock out in both the open and closed position. 8. Housings shall be made of a material having ductile properties that will deform plastically without fracturing. 9. An adjustment mechanism on the rope lock shall permit adjustment of the clamping members for ropes of differing diameters. 10. Attachment of the lock to the rail shall be such that loads imposed on the lock are safely transferred to the rail structure. 11. Rope locks shall be positioned to impose minimal wear on the operating line as it passes through the system. 12. Rope locks that squeeze the rope to hold it in place shall not be allowed. 13. Rope locks shall not be welded to the locking rail. 14. See Section labeling and Marking for labeling requirements.
M. Purchase lines 1. Purchase lines shall be Stage Set X or Multi-Line II and shall conform to Section Design Factors, Table 1. 2. The minimum nominal diameter of purchase lines shall be no less than 19 mm (3/4 inch). 3. The purchase line shall be installed so that it freely runs through the tension block, head block, and arbor blocks (if used). With the exception of the rope lock, the purchase line shall not contact adjacent line sets or other equipment. If contact with the building structure is unavoidable, a method as determined by a competent person, shall be used to prevent such contact. 4. Purchase line termination a) The purchase line for single purchase systems shall attach to eyes or brackets mounted to the top and bottom of the arbor and designed for that purpose. b) The line shall be terminated with a knot or splice that maintains a minimum 60% of the rope’s tensile strength. The termination shall not interfere with adjacent equipment, and shall be finished in a manner that prevents fraying or unraveling of the rope ends, loosening of the termination, and shall be done in accordance with the rope manufacturer’s recommendations.
N. Lifting or Loft Lines 1. Wire rope shall not be permitted to contact any part of the building structure, adjacent line sets or other equipment not otherwise intended for contact. If such contact is unavoidable, a method as determined by a competent person, shall be used to prevent such contact.
2. Splicing a) Lift lines shall be fabricated of continuous un-spliced lengths of material.
3. Reverse bends
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 130 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
a) In applications where reverse bends are incorporated, the wire rope service life shall be decreased.
4. Wire rope terminations a) All wire rope eye terminations shall use metal thimbles that shall be sized in accordance with the wire rope diameter. b) All additional termination hardware shall be load rated and sized for the working load of the line. Shackles and turnbuckles shall be of forged steel construction only. Turnbuckles shall be provided with a means of being fixed in position after adjustment. Screw pin shackles and turnbuckles with screw pin jaws shall be provided with a redundant fixing means, after pin insertion. The fixing method shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. c) All hardware shall be installed and used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. d) The following termination methods shall be acceptable: 1. Swage type wire rope fittings shall be selected and applied in accordance with the fitting manufacturer’s recommendations. Copper fittings shall be selected as appropriate for the wire rope materials and construction being fastened and as modified by environmental considerations. 2. Forged wire rope clips shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations, and in accordance with any applicable jurisdictional regulation, where the requirements of such regulation are more stringent. Malleable clips shall not be used. 3. Trim chains shall be made of NACM Grade 30 or better proof coil chain, 6 mm (1/4 inch) or larger. The wire rope eye termination shall pass through the end link of the chain. The chain shall be long enough to wrap one and one-half times around the batten and return to connect at the eye termination using a load-rated connection. The installed trim chain assembly shall have a breaking strength greater than the breaking strength of the wire rope. 4. Any chain used in a single load path assembly shall be certified in writing by the chain manufacturer as suitable for the intended application.
O. Labeling and marking 1. All labeling and signage shall comply with the requirements of the following recognized national standards, where such requirements can be implemented with rigging components, assemblies, and systems: a) • ANSI Z535.1, Safety Color Code b) • ANSI Z535.2, Environmental and Facility Safety Sign c) • ANSI Z535.3, Criteria for Safety Symbols d) • ANSI Z535.4, Product Safety Signs and Labels
2. Language a) All signs or labels shall be in English. If operating personnel are not familiar with English, additional signs or labels in the appropriate language shall be permitted.
3. Capacities and sizes a) The working load, manufacturer's name, or grade reference mark shall be permanently displayed on each piece of equipment and hardware. Chain, rope and wire rope shall be exempt from this requirement. b) If the hardware or equipment is size-specific (e.g. wire rope clips), then the size shall be displayed on the product.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 131 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
c) Where permanent labeling or marking of individual components is impractical, then the load, manufacturer, or grade reference information shall be indicated in the system reference documents as required in Section Manuals.
4. Locking rails a) All locking rails shall have an individual, permanent number or name displayed at each rope lock. Provisions shall be made for the temporary display of secondary descriptions. b) A sign shall be displayed at each locking rail stating the capacity of the line sets, electrics, bridges, or other equipment controlled from that position.
5. Operating/loading galleries a) Operating galleries and loading platforms shall have a sign outlining counterweight storage parameters and limits in pounds per square foot (Kilograms per square meter). b) Building structural engineer shall provide this information to installation contractor. c) A warning not to stack counterweight above the toe board shall also be included. d) The weight of each counterweight type and size provided in the system shall also be included.
6. Battens a) Each batten shall be marked and labeled with its set number, stage centerline, and lift line locations. Each batten end shall also be marked.
7. Manuals a) All rigging installations shall include an operations and maintenance manual (“Systems Manual”) for the system. All unique elements of the particular system shall be clearly detailed. The systems manual shall include final print drawings, applicable maintenance requirements, and servicing guidelines plus a listing of component working loads and design factors. b) A supplemental maintenance log shall be maintained, describing all inspections, modifications and repairs to the system, and identifying the person(s) performing such actions.
8. General Signage a) A sign shall be posted in an accessible location providing the name, address and phone number of the primary system contractor, manufacturer, and supplier (if not already listed) of the system equipment.
9. Index Lights a) Index lights with ten inch (0'-10") deep baffle and two circuits of sixty (60) watt lamps on three foot (3'-0") centers (each circuit—lamps on one foot six inch centers (1’-6”)) shall be furnished and supported by an outrigger batten and steel brackets from the stage wall at locations shown on the drawings. b) The index light shall be chain suspended below the lower outrigger batten and have internal wiring and terminals for connection into the building electrical system. c) Provide full depth of stage less 2ft.
6.02 DRAPERY TRACKS A. General 1. All drapery tracks shall be 280 (380) Series as manufactured by Automatic Devices Company or 400 Series as manufactured by H&H Specialties, Inc.: a) Be made of steel or aluminum, b) Be black in color,
B. Traveler Drapery Tracks
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 132 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. Traveler tracks shall be installed on the a) Main Traveler Batten b) Mid Stage Traveler Batten c) Up Stage Traveler Batten
2. The track shall be by one of the pre-approved manufacturers. The track shall include: a) Straight bi-parting track as required by the Rigging Schedule, b) Ball bearing master carrier and single runners, c) Fixings to attach the track to the pipe batten, d) Black pull rope as required, e) Standard pulley set, f) Weighted floor pulley, g) Other minor components as will comprise a complete working rope operated drapery track system.
3. The Main Traveler Track shall include: a) In-Line motor # 2928 by ADC or equal, b) Two (2) Remote Control Stations with Open/Close/Stop buttons 4. The Mid and Rear Traveler Track shall include: a) All hardware and accessories for bi-parting rope operation.
C. Leg Drapery Tracks 1. Leg tracks shall be installed on the: a) 1st Leg Batten b) 2nd Leg Batten c) 3rd Leg Batten 2. Leg tracks shall be ‘walk-a-long’ and continuous for the length of the batten. 6.03 DRAPERY A. General 1. All drapery tracks shall be of IFR Poly Velour except Scrim(s) and Cyc. 2. All drapery shall be sewn with vertical hems, nap down. 3. Provide 24” sample swatch for all fabric types and colors.
B. Main Drape 1. IFR 25/26oz Prestige, 75% Full with 12” On-Stage Side Hem, 6” Off-Stage Side Hem, 6” Bottom Hem, Grommets, Poly Header, Weight Tape, S-Hooks 2. Color selected from manufacturers standard colors
C. Valance 1. IFR 25/26oz Prestige, 75% Full with 12” On-Stage Side Hem, 6” Off-Stage Side Hem, 6” Bottom Hem, Grommets, Poly Header, Weight Tape, S-Hooks 2. Color selected from manufacturers standard colors
D. Mid and Rear Travelers 1. IFR 22oz Valdosta, 50% Full with 12” On-Stage Side Hem, 6” Off-Stage Side Hem, 6” Bottom Hem, Grommets, Poly Header, Weight Tape, S-Hooks 2. Color: Black
E. Legs 1. IFR 22oz Valdosta, 50% Full with 12” On-Stage Side Hem, 6” Off-Stage Side Hem, 6” Bottom Hem, Grommets, Poly Header, Weight Tape, S-Hooks 2. Color: Black
F. Borders 1. IFR 22oz Valdosta, 50% Full with 3” Off-Stage Side Hem, 6” Bottom Hem, Grommets, Poly Header, Weight Tape, Black Ties with white tie at centerline 2. Color: Black
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 133 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
G. Cyc 1. FR LENO White, Flat (0% Full) with 6” Off-Stage Hem, 3” Bottom Hem, Pipe Pocket, Pipe, White Ties with black tie at centerline
H. Scrim 1. Provide (1) IFR Sharkstooth Scrim, Black, Flat (0% Full) with 6” Off-Stage Hem, 3” Bottom Hem, Pipe Pocket, Pipe, Black Ties with white tie at centerline 2. Provide (1) IFR Sharkstooth Scrim, White, Flat (0% Full) with 6” Off-Stage Hem, 3” Bottom Hem, Pipe Pocket, Pipe, White Ties with black tie at centerline
I. Storage 1. Provide canvas storage hampers with wood lids and storage bags for Cyc, Scrim(s), Legs, Borders, Mid-Traveler and Rear-Traveler.
6.04 INSTALLATION A. Install all rigging components per manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications. B. Install track, components, hardware and drapes per manufacturer’s instructions and these specifications. C. Drapes shall not be installed until space is conditioned, clean and all construction work/punch lists have been completed.
6.05 INSPECTIONS A. Prerequisites 1. Minimum inspection and testing requirements are established by the following prerequisites. a) Line set components are manufactured under controlled process environments, and to engineered designs; b) Line set components are installed under conditions where a qualified person evaluates system design; c) Line set component manufacturers provide detailed recommendations for the application and installation of their respective products; d) The line set installation consists of standardized components and equipment layouts.
B. General Requirements 1. All installations shall be visually inspected after installation, and shall be tested for operation in a non-destructive manner. 2. All systems shall be inspected after installation, and prior to user operation. Inspections shall meet requirements of this section, but additional requirements shall be permitted. 3. Qualified persons shall oversee the inspection and testing process, and shall certify that all inspection requirements have been met. 4. Inspection procedures and results shall be fully documented. The testing supervisor, the installer and the system owner shall retain complete copies of the test documentation.
C. Proof testing 1. Any line set not meeting the prerequisite requirements of 6.05 INSPECTIONS A. Prerequisites, above shall be tested by applying a controlled test load of no less than 150% of the design load. PART 7: FIRE CURTAIN
7.01 SUMMARY
A. Theatrical Fire Curtains include equipment assemblies, systems and components required to provide a complete fire curtain system at the proscenium.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 134 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
B. Section Includes:
1. Fire Curtain System for the Proscenium Theatre
2. Work Excluded:
a. Design and Engineering of building structure to which rigging components are attached and from which rigging components are suspended.
b. Design, provision and installation of structural steel, catwalks, railings (except Pin-Rail), walking surfaces, ladders, stairs, bracing, shoring.
3. System:
a. Fire Curtain with motor operation, Non-framed.
4. Provision of materials, components, modifications, assemblies, equipment and services as specified herein. These include, but are not limited to:
a. Verification of site dimensions and conditions
b. Submittals as required by the Contract Documents
c. Submission of Shop Drawings performed, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer experienced in work of similar nature and scope, and licensed to practice by the appropriate governing authority in the state in which the Work is manufactured
d. Engineering of equipment and systems as required by the Contract Documents e. Manufacture of equipment and systems as required by the Contract Documents f. Scheduling, sequencing and coordination with other trades g. Site supervision of equipment and systems installation specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents
h. Testing and demonstration of equipment and systems as specified herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents
i. Record Drawings and Operations and Maintenance Manuals (O&M)
j. Instruction to Owner’s representatives
5. Additional support structures as required to meet the intent of the Contract Documents
6. Furnish equipment and hardware in addition to the items specified previously that are necessary to provide a fully working system in conformance with the intent of the Contract Documents.
C. Products supplied but not installed under this section: Rate of Rise Detectors.
D. Related Sections:
1. Division 5: Metals 2. Division 9: Finishes 3. Division 26: Electrical
7.02 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manual of Steel Construction B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. American Welding Society (AWS) Code for Welding D. National Electric Code (NEC) E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 135 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
7.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. The following establishes minimum safety requirements for the system. Where federal, state and local legislation address these topics, the more stringent requirements take precedence. Requirements noted below in no way relieve the Contractor from the sole responsibility of providing safe systems.
B. STANDARDS: 1. ANSI E1.22 - 2016 or latest revision - Entertainment Technology – Fire curtain Systems a. Full compliance in addition to incorporating design requirements stated herein, and in the Drawings
2. ANSI E1.6-2 – 2012 Entertainment Technology Powered Hoist Systems
3. NFPA-80 – 2016 Chapter 20 – Fabric Fire curtains
C. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide electrical devices and components that are NEMA and UL approved for the applications. Wiring and electrical service shall be performed by a licensed electrician and conform to applicable codes.
2. All materials shall be new, unused, and of the latest design.
3. Minimum design factor for lifted loads: 8:1
a. Design factor shall include the effects of static loads, dynamic impact loads, and reductions for end terminations and bending ratios.
b. Dynamic impact loads shall be included in the design of all components. The minimum impact factor may be assumed as 33 percent of the static load. Alternately, the Contractor may calculate the impact factor based on the selected hoist components, loads, and hoist speeds. The Contractor’s calculations shall be submitted and approved by the Architect and project Structural Engineer. The calculations shall include the effect of an emergency stop while lowering the load at maximum speed. In no case may the impact factor be less than 15 percent of the static load.
c. Increase the design factor for ropes where normal operating loads include cyclic dynamic loads to suit the system operational requirements for required service life.
4. Minimum design factor for static loads: 5:1
5. Cable bending ratio:
a. Manually operated systems: Cable diameter x 28
b. Motorized systems: Comply with wire rope manufacturer’s minimum recommended bending ratio for the style and grade of wire rope
6. Maximum Fleet Angle: 1.5 degrees
7. Gear motors: Minimum Class B insulation, totally enclosed fan ventilated (TEFC)
8. Gear motor reducers: AGMA load classification of 1 and minimum mechanical service factor of 1.25
9. Gear motor brakes: Minimum retarding torque equal to 200 percent of the motor full load torque
10. Bearings: Two (2) times required load at full speed for 2000 hours
D. Provide assemblies, cable components, connections, equipment, hardware and linkages employed in supporting, in whole or in part, overhead loads that are rated and designed for that application. Base loading for each component on the maximum percentage of the working load limit of the system in which the component is employed.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 136 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
E. Provide mule blocks, rollers and guides as required to provide proper alignment and maintain allowable fleet angles.
F. Do not substitute cast iron components for arbor top and bottom members and clamps for attaching blocks to the support structure.
G. Provide systems designed to reflect industry standard safeguards and precautions related to normal use of the equipment under ideal operating and loading conditions.
7.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings shall be submitted within seventy (70) days of receipt of fully executed contract.
2. All Submittals shall be complete. No partial Submittals shall be allowed.
3. Drawings will show all information necessary to explain fully the design features, appearance, function, fabrication, installation and use of system components in all phases of operation.
4. Engineering studies, calculations, models and reports shall be made part of the shop drawing submittal.
5. Fabrication, installation and erection shall not commence until Shop Drawings have been reviewed and marked by the Architect.
6. All sheets in the Submittal shall be of the same size.
7. Submittal shall include a title sheet listing all sheets in the Submittal.
C. Quality Assurance/Control
1. Test Reports, Fabric Certificates – Submit product data sheet with applicable testing reports to establish compliance with standards and references.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. Operations and Maintenance Manuals, in quantities of three (3), shall include:
a. Contact information for Theatre Equipment Contractor and pertinent manufacturers b. Safety and Operational Instructions c. Complete parts and subassembly list d. Equipment design parameters such as safe working loads and duty cycles e. Wiring diagrams and termination schedules f. Maintenance Schedule
g. Maintenance procedures for finishes
h. Certificates of compliance with applicable codes i. Records of final testing and log j. Spare parts list and source information k. Statements and Terms of Warranty 2. Bound O&M documents shall be provided separate from general building sections so they can be turned over to the users after approval.
4. Provide draft copy of completed manuals for review to the Architect before the start of commissioning.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 137 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
5. Include diagrams depicting the system layout and maximum load limitations (drawn not less than 1/4 inch = 1'-0").
6. Provide three (3) hard copies of all As-Built Shop Drawings. Include notation of variation from original shop drawing submittals.
7. Provide the following digital files on non-volatile memory media:
a. Shop Drawings in DWG or DXF format.
b. All submittal files and As-Built drawings in tabbed and indexed PDF format.
7.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Fire Curtain Contractor shall be responsible for all shipping, handling, receiving, unloading, storage and protection of the fire curtain equipment.
B. Fire Curtain Contractor shall be responsible for clean-up and disposal of all fire curtain system packing, crating and shipping material to disposal containers provided By Others.
7.06 COORDINATION
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
B. Coordinate with the Design Team, General Contractor and other Trades the construction of support and fixings for tracks, hangers and winch assemblies, provision of sleeves for operating lines, access panels, etc.
C. Coordinate with Division 26 provision of electrical supplies and conduit for control wiring.
7.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty
1. Warrant systems and equipment to be free of defective components, faulty workmanship and improper adjustment for a period of two (2) years from the date of Owner's acceptance. Paint and exterior finishes are excluded relative to failure due to unusual exposure. Replace items showing evidence of defective materials or workmanship (including installation workmanship) within thirty (30) days after notification. Make replacements without cost to the Owner. Rectify conditions that might present a hazard to human life, well-being and or property within forty- eight (48) hours of notification.
2. Warranties on manufactured equipment shall commence on the date of system acceptance.
7.08 SPARES AND MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Extra Materials:
1. Provide the following units as spares to be included in the base bid and turned over to the Owner at the time of system commissioning and training:
a. Unique test equipment for repair and maintenance of the motive and control systems b. One (1) direct strike limit switches of the type used in the system (if applicable) c. Six (6) square feet of curtain fabric for patching and repair
2. Replace extra materials that are used during the warranty period so that the complete specified inventory is available throughout the warranty period.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 138 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
B. Maintenance Service:
1. Provide maintenance service for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of the installation. This service consists of two (2) visits to the site for checking and adjusting of equipment. Perform the first visit six (6) months after the system has been in use. Perform the second visit twelve (12) months after the system has been in use. Arrange visit to be at a time mutually agreeable to the Owner. In no case should the first maintenance service be deferred for longer than 8 months after acceptance and the second no longer than sixteen (16) months after acceptance.
PART 8 FIRE CURTAIN SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
8.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide the rigging systems from components (except where otherwise stated) that are the products of one of the following manufacturers:
1. Thern Stage Equipment, Winona, MN 507-668-0625 Basis of Design
B. Provide the fire curtain material, assembly and related hardware of one of the following manufacturers:
1. Thermotex Industries, Inc., Greenville, SC – 800-898-878 Basis of Design: #44-WFCC aka CSC-G2WC, i. Color: black
8.02 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall conform to the following ASTM and ANSI standard specifications:
1. Structural steel shapes and plate shall be A36 2. Steel tube shall be A500 3. Malleable iron casting shall be A47 4. Gray iron casting shall be A48
B. Fasteners:
1. Comply with ANSI B18.2.1&2 Specification for square and hex bolts and nuts 2. Bolts and fasteners shall be grade 5 or better 3. Fasteners shall be rated for the anticipated loads 4. Provide fasteners with approved markings indicating their rating.
C. Electrical and Control Components:
1. Comply with the requirements of the NFPA National Electric Code - 2014.
8.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
1. Provide fire curtain system hardware by Thern Stage Equipment, or equal.
B. Hardware shall include but not be limited to:
1. Head Blocks
2. Loft Blocks.
3. Smoke Pocket
4. Fire Curtain Hoist
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 139 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
5. Fire Line blocks and pulleys.
6. Electrical Fire Line Release System with Rate of Rise Detectors and Integral Battery Backup.
7. Wire rope, bolts, clips, anchors.
C. Fire Curtain:
1. Provide a fabric, as specified herein, fire curtain on the stage side of the proscenium opening. Curtain shall overlap the fire rated structural opening not less than 18 inches on each side and 24 inches at the top.
2. Construct the curtain of panels running vertically for the full height of the curtain. Horizontal seams are unacceptable. Overlap seams not less than 1 inch and sew with a double stitching of ceramic thread of equal or greater strength than yarn of cloth.
3. Provide the fire curtain with a pocket on the top through which the top batten may be inserted and secured. Provide single thickness 6 inch pocket for receiving top pipe batten and 8 inch pocket for receiving bottom pipe batten.
4. Provide the bottom of the curtain with a yield pad of noncombustible material not less than 3 inches thick to form a seal against the floor.
5. Reinforce the sides of the curtain with 6 inch reinforced full height hems. Provide the sides with #071 Bronze Spool Guide/Wire Guide System installed on 18 Inch Centers.
6. Untested fabrics or fabrics incorporating asbestos are unacceptable.
D. Fire curtain Batten:
1. Use minimum 1.5” I.D. Schedule 40 steel pipe for the fire curtain top batten.
2. Use minimum 1.5” I.D. Schedule 80 steel pipe for the bottom batten.
3. Join batten sections with internal sleeves of no less than 24 inches.
E. Smoke Seals:
1. Provide top smoke seal from the same material as the curtain. Provide the seal continuously along the entire width of the curtain. Incorporate anchoring locations required for top batten guide system described herein.
2. Provide the bottom smoke seal as a 3 inch minimum diameter continuous yield pad packed with shredded fiberglass. Bottom smoke seal to be properly encased in the same material used for the curtain and secured to the bottom of the curtain.
F. Smoke Pockets:
1. Provide smoke pockets from appropriate steel sections for curtain loads sized to the minimum depth required to accommodate curtain and guides. Pocket depth from proscenium wall shall not exceed 8 inches.
2. Provide Fire curtain guide track systems according to applicable local codes.
3. Close the bottom of smoke pockets with an appropriately sized steel plate welded to the end of the channel to provide for the attachment of the guide system.
4. Provide properly located smoke pockets installed 90 degrees vertical. Locate the on-stage edge of pockets a minimum of 6 inches offstage from the proscenium opening and with a minimum of 8 inches of curtain extending into each pocket. All edges of pockets shall be hand smooth.
5. Secure smoke pockets to the wall by means of appropriate fasteners. Lag bolts and shields or plastic type anchoring devices are unacceptable.
6. Fire caulk voids between smoke pocket and structural opening.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 140 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
7. Stagger splices with track splices to provide uniform stability.
G. Side Edge and Guides:
1. Curtain fabric shall be supported by side edge framing and fastening sufficient to sustain a minimum uniform pressure differential of 2 pounds per square foot or as required by code.
H. Fire curtain Hoist:
1. Hoist shall consist of a cable drum, coupled to an electric gear motor. Hoist shall have an 1,000lb lifting capacity at a rate of 30 feet per minute. The hoist shall be fully enclosed and supplied with a sturdy metal stand or wall brackets.
2. The unit shall be equipped with an adjustable hydraulic speed governor to provide maximum control and safety in the closing of the fire curtain and to establish the travel time.
3. The curtain shall touch the floor without shock.
4. Control Station: Controls, consisting of up and down pushbuttons and an emergency stop switch, are mounted on the motor starter.
I. Clutch Linkage:
1. A spring-loaded plate friction clutch shall actuate the checked free fall descent of the fire curtain by release of a weighted clutch arm. Achieve the clutch release by the methods described herein. Re- engage the clutch by re-tensioning release lines. Provide a proximity switch that will illuminate a ready light on the push button control station when the clutch is engaged.
J. Fire Curtain Control:
1. Fire line System: The manual fire line release system shall consist of a 1/8 inch diameter wire rope, with six fusible links, side mounting pulleys as required, and two fire line release devices, each mounted in a steel enclosure with acrylic viewing window that contains a positive method to release the fire line. Devices shall be mounted 5 feet above the stage floor on each side of the proscenium. All other components such as round weight arbors, arbor guards, floor pulleys, etc. required to form a fully functional fire line release system shall be provided.
2. Electrical Fireline Release:
a. Electro-mechanical fireline release system which is activated by normally open rate of rise heat detectors, smoke detectors, emergency switches, etc. as well as by manual release of tension in the fire line.
b. Electro-mechanical fireline release system shall utilize a non-destructive release mechanism, to facilitate routine testing by owner. Electro-mechanical systems requiring the replacement of components after activation will not be accepted.
c. Include a test switch in the release mechanism enclosure for testing system operation. d. Provide an integral battery and charger to assure fire curtain operation during power interruptions.
3. Rate of Rise Detectors: Furnish to the designated sub-contractor the required quantity of fast acting rate of rise detectors as indicated on the Drawings. Provide Rate of Rise Detectors with rating as specified by the engineer.
a. Detectors shall continue to function in the event of a facility power loss.
b. A heat detector that closes a normally open electrical contact at a fixed temperature or at a temperature rise of 15 degree F (9.4 degree C) in one minute.
4. Push Button Control: Incorporate push button control station as indicated in the Drawings. a. Provide with momentary operators aligned vertically as indicated in the Drawings. b. The ‘E-Stop’ button shall serve as an indicator for the status of the motor with the following indications:
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 141 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. Extinguished: Controls have not been turned on or are disabled.
2. Slow Flash: The E-Stop button has been pressed at this location.
3. Fast Flash: The E-Stop button has been released, but the controls have not yet been reset.
4. Full Illumination: The controls are ready to be operated.
5. Design, location designation, wiring, termination and containment of detectors to comply with NFPA 17 is the responsibility of OTHERS and is excluded from this section.
K. Fire Curtain Counterweight Arbor System:
1. Provide counterweight arbor system if necessary for fire curtain operation.
2. Guide arbors in a steel lattice guide track located above the fire curtain motor.
3. Size arbor length as required to accommodate the necessary counterweights.
4. Provide bottom of travel shock absorption by means of coil springs. Bumpers should contact arbor bottom and not interfere with cables or operation of arbor.
L. Fire curtain Lattice Guides:
1. Tracks of appropriately sized steel tees or angles with a finished length to allow necessary arbor travel with working space for overtravel and for hoist operation.
2. Bracing members of appropriately sized steel plate arranged to form a rigid and aligned guide structure.
3. Secure lattice track to the wall by means of appropriately configured fasteners. Lag bolts and shields or plastic type anchoring devices are unacceptable.
M. Direct Strike Limits:
1. Heavy duty lever operated type mounted to the lattice guide assembly to provide normal arbor ends of travel and overtravel functions.
2. Position direct strike limits offstage and adjacent to galleries for service.
N. Safety Chains:
1. Safety Chains: Supply one more safety chain than the number of lift cables. 3/8 inch minimum, proof coil chains shall be located between lift cables. Chains shall be attached to the top of the curtain with pipe clamps around the top of the batten and chain shackles. The other end shall be appropriately attached to the building structure.
O. Lift Cables:
1. Proscenium fire curtain lift cables shall be of sufficient size and capacity for the load, and according to applicable local codes. Cables shall be terminated with appropriate cable thimbles and quantities of forged cable clips at each end. The curtain end of each cable shall be attached to a pipe clamp around the top batten.
P. Signage:
1. Provide, adjacent to each wire rope fire release line on both sides of the proscenium, in plain view, a painted metal sign with 1 inch high white characters on a red background; bearing the inscription: "IN CASE OF FIRE LIFT GLASS AND PULL LEVER TO RELEASE FIRE CURTAIN”.
Q. Finishes:
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 142 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
1. Finish all visible components in this system with red semi-gloss enamel.
8.04 COMPONENTS
A. Size all components and hardware for their application and purpose.
B. Components include but are not limited to: Wire Rope Clips (Trade name: Crosby Clips), Compression sleeves (Trade Name: NicoPress), Eyebolts, Shackles, Thimbles and Turnbuckles.
C. Use only hardware rated for its intended purpose.
D. Provide clevis pins and mousing.
PART 9 FIRE CURTAIN INSTALLATION
9.01 INSTALLERS
A. Installers: Skilled technicians who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and best industry practices for the proper installation of the Work.
1. Installation supervisors shall have satisfactorily passed ETCP Rigging qualification tests for theatre and shall be currently certified for these activities.
B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 - 2015.
1. Welders shall have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and shall be currently certified for these processes.
2. Provide a copy of welding certificates held by welders employed in the fabrication or installation of the work upon request.
9.02 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Verify Site Conditions:
1. Examine work prepared by others to receive work of this Section. The scope of inspection includes but is not limited to:
a. Verify mounting surfaces are ready to accept the Work.
b. Verify all mounting structure is plumb, level and true.
c. Inspect components of the system to ensure no damage has occurred during shipping or storage.
2. Discrepancies:
a. In the event of discrepancies, immediately notify the Architect through project specific channels.
b. Do not proceed with the installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
c. Commencement of Work shall indicate an acceptance of existing conditions.
3. Verify site is ready to receive the equipment. Deliver equipment to the site only after the building has been closed in. Coordinate storage at the site and ensure the materials and components are undamaged.
9.03 PREPARATION
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 143 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
A. Protection: Protect the surrounding environment and the work of others from damage by the installation.
B. Verify field measurements at the site prior to installation and modify the system accordingly.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces as necessary prior to commencing installation.
1. Contractor is not responsible for cleaning up after or removing the debris of other contractors or trades.
9.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Connection to Other Systems
1. Coordinate connection of electro-mechanical curtain release to building alarm system.
B. Block Connection:
1. Align blocks as required by the Drawings and accompanying schedules. Conform the alignment to the requirements set forth herein.
2. Secure blocks as per accepted mounting design. Where connection device contact is not uniform, employ steel shims. Perform mounting to ensure blocks are securely attached to the support structure and are immobile except by intentional user action.
3. Weld motorized set components after final alignment when called for by Standard(s), Code or Manufacturer Instructions.
C. Motorized Rigging Installation:
1. Install all local controls including motor control/starter cabinets, limits, and positioning devices.
2. Provide motor enclosure and related control enclosures to the DIV26 Contractor for mounting, piping and wiring.
3. Coordinate with Division 26 for wiring and the connection to fixed disconnects and other power sources.
4. Provide Rate of Rise Detectors to DIV 26 Contractor for mounting, piping and wiring.
F. Additional Installation
1. Signage:
a. Install signage as described in the Contract Documents.
9.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:
1. During the installation of equipment, the Contractor shall arrange for safe access as necessary for inspection of equipment by the Architect. 2. Any equipment that fails to meet with the specifications shall be repaired or replaced with suitable equipment prior to testing and final inspection.
B. Testing:
1. Provide fourteen (14) days’ notice of all tests so that the Architect may witness such tests.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 144 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
2. Record the date, time, details and results of all tests and demonstrations and any subsequent re- tests. Record the data in a system logbook to be handed over to the user, with operation and maintenance manuals, after acceptance.
3. General:
a. Inspect the completely assembled system including all mechanisms, fittings, control panels, etc., and make good all deficiencies.
b. Demonstrate compliance with tolerances specified in the Contract Documents.
4. Site Acceptance Test:
a. Demonstrate ascent and descent cycles from all release points.
b. Verify speed, noise, and stability compliance with the Contract Documents.
c. Comprehensively verify the accuracy of positioning approached from both directions to each preset position. (Applicable to motorized systems and equipment)
5. Provide demonstration and testing as required to obtain certification(s) that may be required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
6. Contractor is solely responsible for all costs in obtaining certification. Certification is a condition of final site acceptance.
7. At the time of these tests all temporary bracing, scaffolding, etc. shall be removed to permit full operation of and access to all equipment.
C. Final Inspection:
1. Final review will be made by the Architect following written notice from the Contractor that the installation is complete.
2. At the time of inspection, furnish sufficient workers to operate all equipment and to perform such adjustments and tests as may be required by the Architect. Any equipment that fails to meet with the specifications shall be repaired or replaced with suitable equipment and the inspection shall be rescheduled under the same conditions as previously specified.
3. At the time of these inspections, no other work shall be performed in the auditorium and stage areas. All temporary bracing, scaffolding, etc. shall be removed to permit full operation of and access to all equipment.
9.06 CLEANING
A. Provide clean-up, including removal of packing materials, construction debris, etc., resulting from the execution of the work.
B. Clean and/or repair any damage to portions of the work during the execution of the Work.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of surfaces or equipment provided by this section. Coordinate to ensure that the work is not damaged during subsequent installations by other trades.
9.10 TRAINING
A. Provide a total of four (4) hours of training to the Owner on use and maintenance of the Fire Curtain equipment after the systems have been commissioned and accepted as satisfactory. Training to take place in (2) 2-hour sessions. Training to take place prior to active use of the facility and equipment.
B. Demonstrate system operation and instruct the Owner or representatives in the proper use, care, and maintenance of all items.
FEBRUARY 18, 2020 SECTION 260600 - 145 PEBBLEBROOK HIGH SCHOOL STAGE LIGHTING AND RIGGING EQUIPMENT #B007 ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS - 20180008
C. Note training date, time, location and all attendees by first and last name in the log book.
END OF SECTION